Schneider Electric PL7 Junior/Pro - Premium PLC Applications - Analog, Regulation PID, Weighing User Guide

PL7 Junior/Pro

Premium PLC Applications

Analog, Regulation PID, Weighing

TLX DS 57 PL7 xx eng

2

Related Documentation

At a Glance This manual is made up of 8 volumes: l l

Volume 1 l l

Common application specific functions

Discrete Application l AS-i Implementation l Operator Dialog Application

Volume 2 l l Counting Application

Volume 3 l l l Axis Command Application

Volume 4 l Step by Step Control Application

Volume 5 l l Electronic Cam Application

Volume 6 l l l SERCOS(r) Movement Command Application

Volume 7 l Analog Application l PID Control Application l Weighing Application

Volume 8 l Regulation Application

Related Documentation

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

3

Related Documentation

4

TLX DS 57 PL7 xx

Table of Contents

About the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Part I

Analog task function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1

The analog task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Introduction to the analog function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 2

The racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1

TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.2

TSX AEY 810 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

2.3

TSX AEY 1614 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Introducing the TSX AEY 1614 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Timing of measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Monitoring under/overshoot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

5

6

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2.4

TSX AEY 414 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Introducing the TSX AEY 414 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Sensor link monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 414 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.5

TSX AEY 420 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Introducing the TSX AEY 420 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Thresholds and Event Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 420 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.6

TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Characteristics of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Output characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter 3

The remote analog TBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

3.1

TBX AES 400 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Introducing the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Timing of measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Monitoring under/overshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Measurement filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Displaying measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3.2

TBX AMS 620 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Timing of measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Filtering of measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Displaying measurements on inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Characteristics of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Fault handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs . . . . . . . . 114

Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sensor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

3.3

TBX ASS 200 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Fault handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Chapter 4

The remote analog Momentum modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4.1

170 AAI 030 00 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

4.2

170 AAI 140 00 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

170 AAI 140 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

4.3

170 AAI 520 40 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

170 AAI 520 40 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

4.4

170 AAO 120 00 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Introducing the 170 AAI 120 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . 145

4.5

170 AAO 921 00 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Introducing the 170 AAI 921 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

170 AAO 921 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . 150

4.6

170 AMM 090 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

170 AAM 090 00 module words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

7

8

Chapter 5

Module configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5.1

Configuring the analog application: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module . . . . . 163

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module . . . . . . 165

How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module . . . . . 167

How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the

FIPIO bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

5.2

Parameters for analog input channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Input parameters for racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

5.3

Parameters for analog output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Output parameters for racked analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

5.4

Module configurations (illustrations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current . . . . 185

Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel . . . . . . . . . 187

Modifying the filter value of analog module channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module . . . . . . 190

Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules 191

Modifying Input channels used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection. . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Cold junction compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 6

The Debugging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Description of an analog module debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Analog module diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Forcing/unforcing analog channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Detailed analog channel diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Modifying the channel filtering value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Aligning an input channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Modifying the fallback value of an output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Calibration function for an analog module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Chapter 7

Associated bits and words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

7.1

Addressing of analog module objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Addressing objects of analog rack module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Addressing objects of remote analog modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

7.2

Implicit exchange objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.3

Explicit exchange objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Explicit exchange objects: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Details on analog function explicit exchange words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Part II

The regulation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Chapter 8

General on the PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

General introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Principal of the regulation loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Development methodology of a regulation application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 9

Description of the regulation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Programming a regulation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

PID Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Programming the PID function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

PWM Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Programming the PWM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

SERVO Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Programming the SERVO function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Performance of the functions in the operating mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Chapter 10

Operator dialogue on CCX 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Dialog operator on the CCX 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Selecting a loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Controlling a loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Adjusting a loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

PID_MMI Function: programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating

modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

9

10

Chapter 11

Characteristics of the functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Memory occupency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Function running time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Chapter 12

Example of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Description of the application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Configuration of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Programming the example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chapter 13

Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

PID parameter adjustment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Role and influence of PID parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Part III

Weighing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Chapter 14

General Introduction to the Weighing Dedicated Function . 295

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Description of the weighing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Operation of the weighing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Implementing the Weighing Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Weighing Application Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Chapter 15

Configuration of the Weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen . . . . . . 306

Weighing Module Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

How to modify the task parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

How to modify metrological information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

How to modify the zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

How to modify the data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

How to modify the stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

How to Modify the Flow Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

How to Modify the Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

How to Modify the Threshold Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Chapter 16

Weighing programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

16.1

General on the weighing programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Principle of programming a weighing application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module . . . . . . . 324

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function . . . . . . . . . . 325

Presymbolization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

16.2

Language objects for programmed exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing

Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

16.3

Language objects for user-defined exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Explicit Exchange Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2 . . . . . . . . . 337

Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

16.4

Description of the commands conveyed by program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

How to carry out the tare mode via the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

How to return to gross weight measurement via the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

How to display the manual tare via the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

16.5

Modifying the parameters by program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Modify Parameters by Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

PL7 instructions used for adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Reading the configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 17

Calibrating the measurement string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Introduction to the Calibration Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Description of the Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

How to Achieve Forced Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Performing a Forced Calibration by Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Chapter 18

Debugging the weighing function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function . . 372

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

11

12

Chapter 19

Protecting the adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

How to protect the adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Legal metrology and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Chapter 20

Operating a weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Ways of displaying weighing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Description of the display transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Weighing module operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Chapter 21

Diagnostics of the weighing application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Introduction to Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Chapter 22

Examples of the weighing program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Example of a tare mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Dosage example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Glossary

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

About the book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual deals with the software implementation of applications (apart from communication applications) on TSX/PMX/PCX57 by the PL7 software.

Validity Note The update of this publication takes into account the functions of PL7 V4.3.

Nevertheless, it enables you to use earlier versions of PL7.

Related

Documents

Title of Documentation

Hardware Implementation Manual

Reference Number

TSX DM 57 xx E

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at

[email protected]

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

13

About the book

14

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog task function

I

At a Glance

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the analog task function on Premium PLCs and describes its implementation withPL7 software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

Chaptername

The analog task

The racked analog modules

The remote analog TBX modules

The remote analog Momentum modules

Module configuration

The Debugging function

Associated bits and words

Page

17

19

91

123

161

199

217

15

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog task function

16

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The analog task

1

Introduction to the analog function

Introduction The analog function applies to: l l analog input/output modules placed on a rack, remote analog input/output modules on the FIPIO bus.

Note: To access the latter, the configured processor must be a processor with a built-in FIPIO link.

Installing the analog function requires the physical operating context to be defined in which it will be integrated (e.g. rack, supply, processor, modules or devices, etc.), and then the software installation to be carried out.

This second point is carried out by various PL7 editors: l l either offline, or in online mode; in this instance, modification is limited to certain parameters.

Note: Online mode functions cannot be accessed for remote input/output modules.

17

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog task

Installation principle

Mode

Offline

On- or offline

Online

On- or offline

The table below shows the different installation phases for the analog function.

Phase

Module declaration

Configuration

Confirming configuration parameters

Global application confirmation

Symbolization

Description

Choice: l of geographical position, l number and slot in the case of racked module, l l connection point for a remote module, module type.

Entering configuration parameters.

Confirmation at module level.

Confirmation at application level.

Programming

Transfer

Debugging

Calibration

Documentation

Symbolizing the variables associated with the application specific function.

Programming the functions that the specific function must carry out using: l l word and bit objects associated with the module, task-specific instructions.

Transferring the application to the PLC.

Debugging the application using: l debug help screens, allowing inputs and outputs to be controlled, l diagnostics screens, allowing faults to be identified.

Module calibration, which allows: l l long term module drifts to be corrected, increased measurement accuracy.

Printing different information relating to the application.

Note: The order defined above is given as an indication. The PL7 software can use editors interactively in any order you wish (however you cannot use the data or program editors without first configuring the input/output modules).

18

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The racked analog modules

2

At a Glance

Aim of this chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the racked analog modules.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

Topic

TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

TSX AEY 810 Module

TSX AEY 1614 Module

TSX AEY 414 Module

TSX AEY 420 Module

TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules

Page

20

32

43

55

69

79

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

19

Racked analog modules

2.1

TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 rack modules.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Sensor alignment

Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

Page

21

23

25

27

29

30

31

20

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

General

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules are high level 8 /16 input devices for industrial measurement.

Associated to sensors or transmitters, they support surveillance, measurement and regulation functions for continuous processes.

The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules support the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V,

0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of their inputs, depending on the selection made in configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an

analog module, p. 183).

The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel in the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access channel command (forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

The TSX ASY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 input modules support the following functions:

Channel selection Optocoupler

Multiplexer A/D

Optocoupler

Processing

X bus

Interface

1000

Vrm s

Function

1 2 3

DC/DC

Converter

4

7

5 V

5

6

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

21

Racked analog modules

Description The table below shows the various functions

Address Element

1

2

3

Function

Connection to the process and scanning of input channels l l l l physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), protection of the module against voltage surges using limiter diodes, adapting input signals using analog filtering, scanning input channels using static multiplexing.

Adapting input signals l gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined at configuration (unipolar or bipolar range, voltage or current), l compensation for drifts in the amplification string.

l 12 bit analog/digital converter.

Digitalization of analog input measurement signals

4

5 transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user l l

Interface and communication with the application l l l l l acknowledgment of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module, measurement filtering (digital filtering), based on configuration parameters, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

6

7

Module power supply -

Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application l l l l testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

22

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Timing of measurements

At a Glance The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined on configuration: l l normal cycle or fast cycle.

in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle time is therefore proportional to the number of channels registered as used.

Note: In fast cycle, filtering is inhibited

Channel scanning cycle

The scanning cycle of channels used in normal cycle is as follows:

Channel 0

Tv

Channel 1

Tv

Channel 7 (or 15)

Tv

Internal ref.

Tv

Cycle time

Tv = scanning time for one channel

Internal ref. = corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references built-in to the module, to allow periodic self-calibration

The scanning cycle of channels used in fast cycle is as follows:

Example for channels 3, 5, 6

Channel 3

Tv

Channel 5

Tv

Channel 6

Tv

Internal ref.

Tv

Cycle time = (3+1)xTv

Tv = scanning time for one channel

Internal ref. = corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references built-in to the module, to allow periodic self-calibration

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

23

Racked analog modules

Calculating cycle time

The table below gives the values of cycle time according to the cycle used:

Module

TSX AEY 800

TSX AEY 1600

Normal cycle

27 ms

51 ms

Fast cycle

(N+1) x 3 ms l where N = number of channels used.

(N+1) x 3 ms l where N = number of channels used.

Note: The module cycle is asynchronous with the PLC cycle. At the start of each

PLC cycle, the channel values are recognized. If the cycle time of the MAST task is less than that of the module, some values will not have changed.

Illustration:

Module processing time

MAST task time changes of the channel values

24

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoot

At a Glance

Measurement zones

The TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules give the choice of 6 ranges of voltage or current for each of their inputs. For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.

This check is always enabled.

Generally speaking, the modules will authorize an over/undershoot by 5% of the positive electrical part of the range.

The measurement scale is divided into three zones: undershoot zone nominal zone overshoot zone lower limit upper limit l l l the nominal zone is the measurement scale that corresponds to the range selected, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower limit.

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of saturation of the measurement string

, which is signaled by:

Bit name

%Ixy.i.ERR

%MWxy.i.2:X1

Meaning (when = 1)

Channel fault

Range over/undershoot on the channel

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

25

Racked analog modules

Over/Undershoot limits

Range

+/-10V

0..10V

0..5V

1..5V

0..20mA

4..20mA

+3.2mA

The over/undershoot limit values are as follows:

Lower limit Lower limit Values available by default in standardized format

-10.5V

-0.5V

+10.5V

+10.5V

+/- 10500

-500...10500

0V

0.8V

0mA

+5.25V

+5.25V

+21mA

-500...10500

-500...10500

0...10500

+20.8mA

-500...10500

Minimum limit in userdefined format

Maximum limit in userdefined format

Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2

Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 approx. -10mV

Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2 approx. -40

µ

A

Min-5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Max+5%x(Max-Min)/2

Note: Min designates the minimum value indicated by the user. Max designates the maximum value indicated by the user.

26

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Measurement filtering

At a Glance

Mathematical formula

The filtering used is first order filtering.

The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modifying the channel filtering value,

p. 208) from the PL7 screen or via the program.

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be modified, even when the application is in RUN mode .

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode

Values for the

TSX AEY 800 module

The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

4

High filtering 5

6

0

1

2

Value to be selected

α

corresponding

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time at 63%

Cut-off frequency

(Hz)

0

100 ms

202 ms

0

1,591

0,788

419 ms

851 ms

1,714 ms

3,442 ms

0,379

0,187

0,093

0,046

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

27

Racked analog modules

Values for the

TSX AEY 1600 module

The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

4

High filtering 5

6

0

1

2

Value to be selected

α

corresponding Filter response time at 63%

Cut-off frequency

(Hz)

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

0

178 ms

382 ms

791 ms

1,607 s

3,239 s

6,502 s

0

0,894

0,416

0,201

0,099

0,049

0,024

28

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Displaying measurements

At a Glance

Standardized display

The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, l l who can choose between: using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/-10 V), parameterizing his display format by indicating the minimum and maximum values required.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also symbolized °/

°°°

):

Type of range Display unipolar range:

0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range:

+/-10V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

°°°

)

to +10000 °/

°°°

)

User-defined display

The user can select the value scale (See Modifying the display format of an input

channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) in which the measurements are expressed,

by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/

°°°

(or -10000 °/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum (+ 10000 °/

°°°

).

These minimum and maximum limits are integers within the range – 30000 and +

30000.

Example:

Let us suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure information on a 4-20mA loop, with 4mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20mA corresponding to 9600 mB.

The user can, therefore, select the user-defined format (User), defining the following minimum and maximum limits:

3200 °/

°°°

for 3200 mB as minimum limit,

9600 °/

°°°

for 9600 mB as maximum limit,

Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (= 4 mA) and 9600 (= 20 mA).

The corresponding values are as follows:

Value transmitted to the program

Value of current

3200 current value

9600

4 mA between 4 and 20mA

20 mA

Value of pressure

3200 mB current value

9600 mB

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

29

Racked analog modules

Sensor alignment

At a Glance Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. An error linked to the process is compensated for.

For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating point of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

Example

Alignment values

Let us suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.

The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required).

After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value that must be entered is 3210.

The alignment value can be modified (See

Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from

the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.

For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel already possesses an alignment.

The alignment offset can also be modified by the program.

Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.

The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.

30

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules

At a Glance

Precautions

Calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is performed

globally for the module on channel 0. It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel in RUN or STOP modes.

When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid (%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1), filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.

As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before switching to calibration.

Procedure

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The following table gives the procedure for calibrating the module:

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Double click on channel 0.

Result : A question appears ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Reply to this question with Yes .

Result : The calibration window appears.

According to the range to be calibrated, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0: l reference voltage = 10 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V and 0..10

V ranges, l reference voltage = 5 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA ranges.

Caution: the 5 V reference is used to calibrate the whole measurement device for the 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA ranges, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated on the current entry.

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), use the Reference drop-down list box to slect this value. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. +/-

10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

Calibrate the module for other ranges, if applicable.

the Return to Factory Parameters command button cancels all previous calibrations, and return to the original calibration settings configured in the factory.

Press the Save command button, in order to recognize and save the new calibration in the module. If you exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

31

Racked analog modules

2.2

TSX AEY 810 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 810 rack-based module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module

Page

33

35

37

40

41

42

32

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX AEY 810 module

General

Structural diagram

TSX AEY 810

The TSX AEY 810 module is a high level 8 input industrial measurement device.

Associated to sensors or transmitters, it is used for monitoring, measuring and regulating continuous processes.

The TSX AEY 810 module offers the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, according to the selection made in configuration

(See

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module, p. 183).

The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel of the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access the channel command (forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

The TSX AEY 810 input module supports the following functions:

1000 Vrms insulation

Channel selection

Optocoupler

Filter

A/D

Optocoupler

Processing

X bus

Interface

Filter

1 2 3

7

DC/DC

Converter

4

5 V

5

6

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

33

Racked analog modules

Description The table below shows the various functions :

Address

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Element

Connection to process and scanning of input channels

Adapting input signals

Digitalization of analog input measurement signals

Transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user

Interface and communication with the application

Module power supply

Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application l l

Function l l l l l l physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), protection of the module against voltage surges using limiter diodes, adapting input signals using analog filtering, scanning input channels using static multiplexing, inter-channel isolation assured by optical connectors.

gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined at configuration

(unipolar or bipolar range, voltage or current), compensation for drifts in the amplification string.

16 bit analog/digital converter.

l l l acknowledgment of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module, filtering (digital filtering) of measurements, based on configuration parameters, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.

l l l l

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

l l l l testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

34

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Timing of measurements

At a Glance The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration l l

(See

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module, p. 190) :

normal cycle or fast cycle.

in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle time is therefore proportional to the number of channels registered as used.

Note: In fast cycle, filtering is inhibited

Channel scanning cycle

The scanning cycle of channels used in normal cycle is as follows:

Channel 0

Tv

Channel 1

Tv

Channel 7 (or 15)

Tv

Internal ref.

Tv

Cycle time

Tv = scanning time for one channel

Internal ref. = corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references built-in to the module, to allow periodic self-calibration

The scanning cycle of channels used in fast cycle is as follows:

Example for channels 3, 5, 6

Channel 3

Tv

Channel 5

Tv

Channel 6

Tv

Internal ref.

Tv

Cycle time = (3+1)xTv

Tv = scanning time for one channel

Internal ref. = corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references built-in to the module, to allow periodic self-calibration

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

35

Racked analog modules

Calculating cycle time

The table below gives the values of cycle time according to the cycle used:

Module Normal cycle Fast cycle

TSX AEY 810 29.7 ms (N+1) x 3.3 ms l where N = number of channels used.

Note: The module cycle is asynchronous with the PLC cycle. At the start of each

PLC cycle, the channel values are recognized. If the cycle time of the MAST task is less than that of the module, some values will not have changed.

Illustration:

Module processing time

MAST task time changes of the channel values

36

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoot

At a Glance

Measurement zones

The TSX AEY 810 module provides a choice of 6 voltage or current ranges for each of its inputs. For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.

This check is optional.

Generally speaking, the module will authorize an overshoot of 5% on the positive electrical part of the range.

The measurement scale is divided into five zones :

Lower limit

Lower value in range

Upper value in range Upper limit l l l l l undershoot zone lower tolerance zone nominal zone upper tolerance zone overshoot zone the nominal zone is the measurement scale that corresponds to the range selected, the upper tolerance zone contains the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit, the lower tolerance zone contains the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk of the user program, error bits are provided:

Bit name

%IWxy.i.1:X5

%IWxy.i.1:X6

%MWxy.i.2:X1

%Ixy.i.ERR

Meaning (when = 1)

Measurement in the lower tolerance zone.

Measurement in the upper tolerance zone.

If over/undershoot monitoring is required, this bit signals an over/undershoot fault in the range: l l

%MWxy.i.2:X14 signals an undershoot,

%MWxy.i.2:X15 signals an overshoot.

Channel fault.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Note: If an over/undershoot occurs, the value measured is limited to value of the corresponding limit.

37

Racked analog modules

Over/undershoot limit values

The overshoot or undershoot values can be configured (See Modifying overshoot

monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193) independently of each other.

They can take integer values between the following values:

Lower limit = Vinf range + lower tolerance zone

Upper limit = Vsup range + upper tolerance zone

The table below gives the values of the tolerance zones for the different ranges:

Range

-

Bipolar

Lower tolerance zone

Default value Max. value

-0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

0

0 Unipolar -0.125 x

∆ gamme

Standardize d Bipolar

-1250 0

Min. value

-0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

-0.25 x

∆ gamme

-2500

Upper tolerance zone

Default value Min. value

-0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

0.125 x

∆ gamme

1250

Standardize d Unipolar

-1250

Userdefined

Bipolar

-0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

0

0

-2500

-0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

1250

0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

Userdefined

Unipolar

-0.125 x

∆ gamme

0 -0.25 x

∆ gamme

With

∆ gamme = Upper range value - Lower range value,

0.125 x

∆ gamme

0

0

0

0

0

0

Max. value

0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

0.25 x

∆ gamme

2500

2500

0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

0.25 x

∆ gamme

Note: l The bipolar range is range +/-10V, the unipolar ranges are ranges 0..20mA,

0..10V, 0..5V, 1..5V, 4..20mA, l By default, overshoot monitoring is active but it can be partially activated (only for overshoots or undershoots) or deactivated.

38

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Example

20 mA 24 mA

Racked analog modules

Overshoot for the range 4..20mA in standardized mode on channel 0

Lower limit : -1250 (2mA) Upper limit = 10625 (21mA)

0 mA 4 mA

1 2 3

Measurement range

Range measurable electronically

4 5

%MWxy.0.2:X1

%MWxy.0.2:X14

%MWxy.0.2:X15

%IWxy.0.1:X5

%IWxy.0.1:X6

%Ixy.0.ERR

Upper limit:

10625

10000

Lower limit:

0

-1250

2 mA 4 mA

1.

Undershoot zone

2.

Lower tolerance zone

3.

Nominal zone

4.

Upper tolerance zone

5.

Overshoot zone

20 mA 21 mA

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

39

Racked analog modules

Measurement filtering

At a Glance

Mathematical formula

The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog

module channels, p. 189).

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode .

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.

Values for the

TSX AEY 810 module

The filter values are as follows: .

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering

High filtering

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

Value to be selected

α

corresponding

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time at 63% cut-off frequency (Hz)

0

104.3 ms

224.7 ms

0

1,526

0,708

464.8 ms

944.9 ms

1,905 ms

3,825 ms

0,342

0,168

0,084

0,042

40

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Displaying measurements

Introduction

Standardized display

The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, l l who can choose (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or

as current, p. 185) between:

using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/-10 V), creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and maximum values required.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/

°°°

):

Type of range Display unipolar range:

0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range:

+/-10V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/ from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

°°°

).

to +10.000 °/

°°°

).

User display The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/

°°°

(or -10000 °/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum + 10000 °/

°°°

.

These minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to

+30000.

Example:

Suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure on a loop of 4-20mA, where

4mA corresponds to 3200mB and 20mA corresponds to 9600mB. The user can, therefore, select the User display format, defining the following minimum and maximum limits:

3200 °/

°°°

for 3200 mB as minimum limit,

9600 °/

°°°

for 9600 mB as maximum limit,

Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).

The corresponding values are as follows:

Value transmitted to program

Value of current

3200 current value

9600

4 mA between 4 and 20mA

20 mA

Value of pressure

3200 mB current value

9600 mB

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

41

Racked analog modules

Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module

Introduction

Precautions

Calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is performed

globally for the module on channel 0. It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.

When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid (bit %IWxy.i.1:X2 = 1), filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.

As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before commencing calibration.

Procedure

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The following table shows the module calibration procedure:

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Double-click on channel 0.

Result : The system asks for confirmation ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Reply to this question with Yes .

Result : The calibration window appears.

Connect a reference voltage on the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be calibrated: l reference voltage = 10 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V and 0..10

V ranges, l reference voltage = 5 V (20 ppm precision) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA ranges.

Caution: the reference 5 V is used to recalibrate the whole measurement channel for ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated mounted on the current input.

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the

Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. +/-10

V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.

the Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

Click on the Save command button in order to register and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

42

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

2.3

TSX AEY 1614 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 1614 rack-based module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEY 1614 module

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module

Page

44

46

48

50

51

52

53

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

43

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX AEY 1614 module

General The TSX AEY 1614 module is a 16 input thermocouple industrial measurement device.

The TSX AEY 1614 module offers the following ranges for each of its inputs l l according to the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the range of an

input or output of an analog module, p. 183):

Thermocouple: B,E,J,K,L,N,R,S,T or U;

Voltage: -80..+80 mV.

Note: The TELEFAST ABE 7 CP A12 connection accessory facilitates connection and provides a cold junction compensation device

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 1614 input module performs the following functions:

Channels

0 to 7

Cold junction

Telefast 8

TSX AEY1614

Acquisition channel

Supply Opto

ADC Opto

Processing

X bus

Interface

Channels

8 to 15

Cold junction

Telefast 8

Acquisition channel ADC Opto

Supply Opto 6

1 2 3

7

4 5

44

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Description Details of the functions are as follows:

Address Element

1 Adaptation and multiplexing

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Amplification

Function

Adaptation consists of a common mode and differential mode filter. It is followed by channel multiplexing via opto switches in order to offer the possibility of common mode voltage between channels (up to 400 V). A second multiplexing stage is used to self calibrate the acquisition string offset as close as possible to the input limit, and select the cold junction compensation sensor included in the telefast package.

This is built around a weak offset amplifier. Lopping the amplifier on entry enables it to withstand voltage surges of 30V.

Conversion

Transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user l l

The converter receives the signal coming from an input channel or cold junction compensation. Conversion is based on a

Σ∆

16 bit converter.

l acknowledgment of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module, measurement filtering (digital filtering), based on configuration parameters, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.

Interface and communication with the application l l l l

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

Module power supply

Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application l l l l testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

Cold junction compensation l l integrated into TELEFAST ABE 7CP A12, to be allowed for by the user if TELEFAST is not used.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

45

Racked analog modules

Timing of measurements

Introduction The cycle time for the TSX AEY 1614 module depends on which cycle is used: l l normal cycle or fast cycle, defined in configuration (See Modifying the Scanning

cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module, p. 190), and the configured options.

in normal cycle, the scanning cycle time is fixed, in fast cycle, only channels registered as used are scanned. The scanning cycle time is therefore proportional to the number of channels registered as used.

Note: The channels are acquired simultaneously in pairs (channel 0 and channel

8, channel 1 and channel 9, …, channel 7 and channel 15).

Normal cycle Example for a module in which all the options are activated.

Wt0 V0

Wt8 V8

Wt1

Wt9

V1

V9

Wt2 V2

Wt10 V10

.......

Wt7 V7

.......

Wt15 V15

TCJC

TCJC

High prec.

High prec.

8ms 70ms 8ms 8ms 70ms 8ms 70ms 70ms 70ms

Module cycle time

Wt: wiring test (8 ms per channel requesting the test)

TCJC: Telefast cold junction compensation (70ms)

High prec. : high precision mode (corresponds to a self-calibration procedure of the module) (70ms)

46

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Fast cycle

Racked analog modules

To reduce the cycle time to the maximum, the system will take account of the fact that the channels are acquired simultaneously in pairs.

Example of optimal cabling for 3 channels used with wiring test, Telefast cold junction compensation, and high precision mode:

If the user wishes to use only 3 channels and have the minimum cycle time, it is best to connect the dual channels. In this way, there will only be an elementary time for two channels. In our example, the dual channels 0 and 8 and channel 1 are selected.

The cycle time is therefore as follows:

2

×

70ms + 2

×

8ms + 70ms + 70ms = 296ms

Tf0

Tf8

8ms

V0

V8

Tf1

Tf9

V1

V9

CSFT

CSFT

70ms 8ms 70ms 70ms

Temps de cycle = 296ms

Hte préc.

Hte préc.

70ms

Note: The module cycle is asynchronous with the PLC cycle. At the start of each

PLC cycle, the channel values are recognized. If the cycle time of the MAST task is less than that of the module, some values will not have changed.

Illustration:

Module processing time

MAST task time changes of the channel values

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

47

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoot

Introduction

Measurement zones

The TSX AEY 1614 module provides the choice of one voltage range and six thermocouple ranges for each of its inputs.

For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit (See Modifying overshoot

monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193).

This check is optional.

The measurement range is divided into three zones: lower limit upper limit undershoot zone nominal zone overshoot zone l l l the nominal zone is the measurement range corresponding to the range selected, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

Note: Beyond these limits (in the overshoot or undershoot zones) which correspond to nominal values in the selected range (thermocouple value limits or -

80mV and +80mV for the electrical range), there is measurement saturation, even if overshoot monitoring has not been activated.

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used:

Bit name

%Ixy.i.ERR

%MWxy.i.2:X1

%MWxy.i.2:X14

%MWxy.i.2:X15

Meaning (when = 1)

Channel fault

Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel

Indicates a undershoot on the channel

Indicates an overshoot on the channel

Note: If overshoot monitoring is not activated, all bits described above will remain at zero irrespective of the measurement value.

48

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

‘Temperature’ range

Racked analog modules

The range overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic overshoot on the acquisition device or to an overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement zone or to

°

C).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

49

Racked analog modules

Measurement filtering

Introduction

Mathematical formula

The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified (See

Modifying the channel filtering value, p. 208) from a programming terminal and by

program.

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n where:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode .

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.

Values for the

TSX AEY 1614 module

The filter values are as follows. They are dependent on the cycle time T:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering

High filtering

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

Value to be selected corresponding

α

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time at 63% cut-off frequency (Hz)

0

4 x T

8 x T

0

0.040 / T

0.020 / T

16 x T

32 x T

64 x T

128 x T

0.010 / T

0.005 / T

0.025 / T

0.012 / T

50

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Displaying measurements

Introduction

Range -

80..+80mV

Thermocouple ranges

This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program. It is necessary to differentiate between the electric ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between standardized and user-defined display formats.

Standardized display:

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % to 2 decimal points, also with

°/

°°°

symbol).

Display from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

°°°

)

to +10.000 °/ l l

User display:

The user can select (See Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage

or as current, p. 185) the range of values within which the measurements are

expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the minimum limit of the range (-10000 °/ the maximum limit corresponding to the maximum limit of the range (+10.000°/

).

),

+30000.

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can select (See Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell

channel, p. 187) one of the two types of display: temperature display and

standardized display.

Temperature display :

The values are supplied in tenths of a degree (Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit selected on configuration).

User display :

The user can select standardized display 0..10000 (i.e. 0 to 10000 °/

°°°

), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

51

Racked analog modules

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 1614 module

Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. An error linked to the process is compensated for.

For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating point of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Conversion line after alignment

Conversion line before alignment

Alignment values

The alignment value can be modified (See

Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from a

programming terminal, even when the program is in RUN mode. For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.

The alignment offset can also be modified by the program.

Alignment is performed on the channel during normal operation, without affecting the module channel operating modes.

The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required

(aligned value) should not exceed 1500.

Note: bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel is aligned.

52

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module

Introduction

Recommendations

Calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is performed on

channels 0 and 8.

On channel 0, two types of calibration are possible: l l calibration of the measurement string for one channel, calibration of the current source necessary for the measurements from resistive probe sensors.

On channel 8, only calibration of the measurement string is possible.

It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.

Note: in the calibration screen, the values displayed on the left side of the screen

(channels 0 et 8) indicate the value measured on the connected voltage reference.

The display format in tenths of mV (16000 displayed for 1.6 V) is not intended to monitor the reference precision but simply to indicate the presence of this reference.

Procedure for recalibrating the measurement string

The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the measurement string:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen

Double-click on channel 0.

Result : The system asks for confirmation ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Reply to this question with Yes.

Result : The recalibration window appears.

Connect a voltage reference to the voltage input to be calibrated, according to the l l range to be calibrated l +25.000mV+/-0.039% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples B, R, S, and T, l +55.000mV+/-0.026% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples U, N, L, and K,

+80.000mV+/-0.023% for the ranges to be calibrated Thermocouples J and E,

+166.962mV+/-0.019% for the range Pt100.

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. 10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

53

Racked analog modules

Step

6

7

Action

Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.

The Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

Click on the Save command button in order to take into account and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

Calibrating the

1.25 mA current source

The current source is used for cold junction compensation. The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the current source:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Double-click on channel 0.

Result : The system asks for confirmation ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Reply to this question with Yes.

Result : The calibration window appears.

Using a precision multimeter (0.068% to 1.25mA), measure the current source value given by the channel to be calibrated.

Note this value and convert it into micro-Amps.

Use the Reference drop-down list box to select Source .

Enter the converted value in the Source field (for example 12501 for 1.2501 mA) then confirm the selection with the OK command button.

Click on the Save command button in order to acknowledge and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

54

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

2.4

TSX AEY 414 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 414 rack-based module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEY 414 module

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Sensor link monitoring

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 414 module

Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module

Calibration

Page

56

58

59

61

62

63

65

66

67

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

55

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX AEY 414 module

General The TSX AEY 414 module is a multi-range acquisition device with 4 separately insulated inputs. For each of its inputs, the module offers ranges dependent on the selection made at (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog

module, p. 183) configuration:

l l l

Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U,

Voltage: -13..+63 mV,

Thermowell Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000 with 2 or 4 wires, or an ohmic range of: 0..400

Ohms, 0..3850 Ohms, l High level +/-10 V, 0..10 V, +/- 5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA with external shunt) or 1..5

V (4..20 mA with external shunt). It should be noted that the external shunts are supplied with the product.

Note: The terminal block is supplied separately under the reference TSX BLY 01.

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 414 input module performs the following functions:

TSX AEY 414

1780 Vrms insulation

2830 Vrm s insulation

Optocouplers

Function

Optocoupler

Optocouplers

Optocouplers

1

Optocouplers

DC / DC converter

1 couplers

2

6

A/D

Measurement of the internal temperature

5 V

3

Processing

X bus

Interface

4

5

56

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Description

Address

1

2

3

4

5

6

Details of the functions are as follows:

Element

Connection to process and scanning of input channels

Digitization of analog input measurement signals

Transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user

Interface and communication with the application

Module power supply

Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application

Function l l l physical connection to the process via a screw terminal block, gain selection, based on the input signal characteristics, defined in configuration for each channel (high-level range, thermocouple or thermowell), multiplexing.

Digitization of analog input measurement signals l l l l

l l l l consideration of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements (channel-by-channel and range-by-range), as well as selfcalibration coefficients for the module, linearization of the measurement provided by the Pt or Ni thermowells, linearization of measurement and adjustment for internal or external cold junction compensation in the case of thermocouples, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters (in physical units or user-defined range).

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

l l l l l testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, sensor link test (except for the ranges +/-10 V, 0..10V, +/-5 V, 0..5V (0..20mA)), watchdog test.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

57

Racked analog modules

Timing of measurements

Introduction

Breakdown of the cycle time

The cycle length for the TSX AEY 414 module is always 550 ms.

This time is independent of the mains frequency (50Hz or 60Hz). The measurements are linked in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and internal selection.

The table below breaks down the different times:

Type of time

Scanning time for channel 0

Scanning time for channel 1

Scanning time for channel 2

Scanning time for channel 3

Scanning time for channel 4

Internal selection

TOTAL

Breakdown of times l l l l l l l l l l l

Wiring test: 4 ms,

Channel conversion: 106 ms.

Wiring test: 4 ms,

Channel conversion: 106 ms.

Wiring test: 4 ms,

Channel conversion: 106 ms.

Wiring test: 4 ms,

Channel conversion: 106 ms.

Wiring test: 4 ms,

Channel conversion: 106 ms.

Internal selection: 110 ms.

Total

110 ms

110 ms

110 ms

110 ms

110 ms

110 ms

550 ms

Note: The internal selection corresponds to the internal temperature, internal references for the self-calibration of the module or to the line compensation for thermowell ranges.

Illustration

110 ms

Tconv Ttf

Tconv

110 ms

Tconv

Channel 0 Channel 1 Internal selection

The cycle is always performed in the same way and lasts 550 ms.

58

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoot

Introduction

Measurement zones

The TSX AEY 414 module provides a choice of voltage ranges, thermocouple ranges and thermowell ranges for each input.

For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.

The measurement range is divided into three zones: lower limit upper limit undershoot zone nominal zone overshoot zone l l l the nominal zone is the measurement range corresponding to the range selected, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used:

Bit name

%Ixy.i.ERR

%IWxy.channel.2:X1

Meaning (when equal to 1)

Channel fault

Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel

Voltage range overshoot values

Range

When using voltage ranges, 5% overshoot of the positive electric part of the range is authorized by the module.

Table of values:

Lower limit Upper limit

+/-10 V

0..10 V

+/-5 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

-10.5 V

-0.5 V

-5.25 V

-0.25 V

+0.8 V

-1 mA

+3.2 mA

+10.5 V

+10.5 V

+5.25 V

+5.25 V

+5.2 V

+21 mA

+20.8 mA

Default values Minimum limit in User mode

+/- 10500

-500..+ 10500

Min - 5%(Max-Min)/2

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

+/- 10500

-500..+ 10500

-500..+ 10500

-500..+ 10500

-500..+ 10500

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

Min - 5%(Max-Min)

Maximum limit in User mode

Max + 5%(Max-Min)/2

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

Max + 5%(Max-Min)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

59

Racked analog modules

Thermal range overshoot values

The range overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic overshoot on the acquisition device or to an overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement zone or to

Table of values:

Lower limit Upper limit Range

Thermo B

Thermo E

Thermo J

Thermo K

Thermo L

Thermo N

Thermo R

Thermo S

Thermo T

Thermo U

Pt100

Pt1000

Ni1000

-13..+63 mV

0..400

Ω

0..3850

Ω

° °

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

-60 °C (-76 °F)

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

-13 mV

0

0

°

° °

°

°

° °

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

+240 °C (+464 °F)

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

+63 mV

400

Ω

3850

Ω

°

°

°

°

°

°

Default values Minimum limit in

User mode

Maximum limit in

User mode

°

°

0

0

+10000

+10000

°

°

°

°

0

0

0

0

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

°

°

°

°

°

°

°

° 0

0

0

0

°

°

°

° 0

0

° 0

-2064..+ 10000 Min

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

Max

0..+10000 Min Max

0..+10000 Min Max

60

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Sensor link monitoring

Resistance values

Sensor link monitoring imposes a maximal value on the resistance Rs of the sensors connected to the module’s inputs. This value Rs max. is compatible with normal operation of the TSX AEY 414 module.

The sensor link fault may correspond to a short-circuit or an open circuit depending on the type of sensor used. On the other hand, the report is global and doesn’t differentiate between a short-circuit and an open circuit.

Table of resistance values:

Sensors

Rs max.

Open circuit

Short-circuit

Thermowells

Pt1000/Ni1000

-

>3850 ohms

150 ohms

Thermowells

Pt100

0

>400 ohms

15 ohms

Thermocouples -15/60 mV,

B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U

100 ohms

100000 ohms undetectable

Note: l The module manages consistency between the terminal block fault and the sensor link fault, l A sensor link fault is not detected in the range 0-5 V / 0-20 mA (the service is not offered to the user and the wiring test is not executed), l In the range 1-5 V / 4-20 mA the wiring test is only effective if the 250 W shunt is connected. If this is not the case (the shunt is not connected), the wiring test cannot detect a fault, even if the cables are cut, l With thermowells, a sensor link fault caused by an anomaly in line compensation can appear or disappear with a maximum delay of 12 s, in relation to the occurrence of the anomaly.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

61

Racked analog modules

Measurement filtering

Introduction

Mathematical formula

The filtering used is first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be changed (See

Modifying the channel filtering value, p. 208) from the PL7 screen and by program.

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n =

α × (

– 1

)

+

(

1 –

α ) ×

Valb n where:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valb(n)=gross value at moment n.

On configuration, the user selects the filtering value from 7 possible values. This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode .

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.

Values for the

TSX AEY 414 module

The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering

High filtering

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Value to be selected corresponding

α

Filter response time at 63%

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

0

1.91 s

4.12 s

8.45 s

17.5 s

34.1 s

68.5 s

Cut-off frequency (Hz)

0

0,083

0,039

0,019

0,0091

0,0046

0,0022

62

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Displaying measurements

Introduction This process is used to select the display format in which the data is supplied to the user-program. It is necessary to distinguish between electrical ranges and thermocouple or thermowell ranges:

Standardized display of electrical ranges

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % to 2 decimal points, also with

°/

°°°

symbol)

Type of range Display unipolar range bipolar range from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to +10.000 °/ from -10000 to 10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

°°°

)

to +10000 °/

°°°

)

User-defined display

The user can select the range of values (See Modifying the display format of an

input channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) within which the measurements are

expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the minimumrange value: 0 °/

°°°

) (or -10000

°/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the maximum range value +10.000 °/

The minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to

.

+30000.

Example:

Let us suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure information on a 4-20mA loop, with 4mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20mA corresponding to 9600 mB.

The user can, therefore, select the user-defined format (User), defining the following minimum and maximum limits:

3200 °/

°°°

for 3200 mB as minimum limit,

9600 °/

°°°

for 9600 mB as maximum limit,

Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).

The corresponding values are as follows:

Value of pressure Value transmitted to the program

Value of current

3200 current value

9600

4 mA between 4 and 20mA

20 mA

3200 mB current value

9600 mB

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

63

Racked analog modules

Displaying thermal ranges

The measurement supplied to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose (See Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell

channel, p. 187) between standardized and temperature display formats.

l With the temperature display format, values are given in tenths of a degree

Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit selected.

l With user display, the user can select standardized display 0..10000 (or 0 to

10000 °/

°°°

) by specifying minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

64

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 414 module

Introduction

Illustration

Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating point. Alignment provides compensation for errors linked to the process, not to the equipment. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or modification of the operating point of an existing sensor will require realignment.

The conversion process is as follows:

Conversion line after alignment

Conversion line before alignment

Example

Alignment values

Suppose that a Pt100 probe, immersed in melting ice (procedure for adjustment of probes) indicates a a temperature of 10 °C (and not 0 °C) after measurement and display. The user can align the measurement to the value 0 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply an offset of -10 systematically for any new measurement.

The alignment value can be modified (See

Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from a

programming terminal, even when the program is in RUN mode.

For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.

The alignment offset can also be modified by the program. Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes.

The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required

(aligned value) should not exceed +/-1000.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

65

Racked analog modules

Cold junction compensation of the TSX AEY 414 module

Definition For thermocouple ranges, the module provides cold junction compensation.

However, the cold junction temperature can be measured either on the module terminal block (by a probe inside the module), or remotely by using an external class

A Pt100 probe (not supplied) connected to channel 0 of the module (See Cold

junction compensation, p. 194).

66

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Calibration

Introduction

Important

Module calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is used

to correct long-term drifts in the module, and to optimize precision at ambient temperatures other than 25 ºC. The TSX AEY414 module is calibrated channel by channel.

The calibration dynamic is limited to 1% of the full scale, as above this level the module considers there to be an acquisition channel anomaly.

Full scale calibration is done on each of the channels and in each of the ranges by placing a calibration source directly on the input terminal block.

Procedure for a voltage input

This procedure is performed from the recalibration screen

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Select a channel and switch to calibration mode.

Connect a voltage reference to the voltage input to be calibrated, according to the range to be calibrated l l

+10.000mV +/-0.018% for voltage ranges,

+60.000mV +/-0.028% for thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U and the range 13..63 mV, l +2.500mV +/-0.016% for the Pt100, Pt1000 Ni1000 thermowell ranges.

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input, select the reference value from the drop-down list.

Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the "Confirm" button. The ranges linked to this reference are then calibrated automatically.

Procedure for thermowell current source

This procedure is performed from the calibration screen

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Select a channel and switch to calibration mode.

Connect a reference current channel-by-channel in order to calibrate.

l +2.5mA +/-0.0328% for thermowell ranges.

Read the value supplied, and give this value in units of x 100 nA.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

67

Racked analog modules

Acknowledgment The calibration value is not acknowledged until it has been saved in the module using the "Save" button.

The "Return to Factory Parameters" button cancels all previous calibrations, and restores the module to its initial calibration (factory settings).

Selecting this button triggers a confirmation message. On the other hand, after confirmation, acknowledgment is immediate and does not need to be saved.

Leaving the screen without saving triggers a message which will remind the user that the save has not been performed. If the user chooses to exit the screen anyway, the new calibration coefficients are lost (the former values are restored).

Note: l For the calibration voltages 10 v and 2.5 V, the expected read value after calibration is 10000 +/-2, l For 60 mV calibration, the expected read value is 9523 +/-2 (10000 corresponds to the full scale, i.e. 63mV).

68

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

2.5

TSX AEY 420 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX AEY 420 rack-based module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEY 420 module

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Thresholds and Event Processing

Displaying measurements

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 420 module

Page

70

72

73

75

77

78

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

69

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX AEY 420 module

General

Structural diagram

The TSX AEY 420 module is an industrial measurement device comprising 4 highlevel fast inputs.

Associated to sensors or transmitters, they support surveillance, measurement and regulation functions for continuous processes.

The TSX AEY 420 module supports the range +/-10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, according to the selection made on configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module,

p. 183).

The TSX AEY 420 input module performs the following functions:

TSX AEY 420

1000 Vrms insulation

Channel selection

Optocoupler

Filter

A/D

Optocoupler

Processing

Filter

Internal reference 9

DC/DC

Converter

5 V 7

1 2 3 4

8

5 6

70

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Description The table below shows the various functions :

Address

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Element

Connection to the input channel process and scanning

Function l l physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s), adapting input signals using analog filtering.

Multiplexing input signals l scanning input channels using static multiplexing.

Adapting input signals l Adapting input signals.

Digitization of analog input measurement signals l

Transformation of input measurements into a unit that can be used by the user l l

Interface and communication with the application l l l l

Module power supply -

16 bit analog/digital converter.

acknowledgment of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as self-calibration coefficients for the module, scaling of measurements, based on configuration parameters.

management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receiving module and channel configuration parameters, transmitting measured values, as well as module status, to the application.

Module monitoring and notification of possible errors to the application

Internal reference l l l l l testing conversion string, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, watchdog test.

An internal calibration reference voltage is used by the module to calculate its self-calibration coefficients.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

71

Racked analog modules

Timing of measurements

Introduction

Breakdown of the cycle time

The cycle length for the TSX AEY 420 module is 1 ms when no event processing is activated. It is independent of the number of input channels used.

The measurements are sequenced as follows: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2 and channel 3.

The scanning cycle is prolonged by 0.150 ms per channel if event processing is activated.

The table below gives the different cycle times

Configuration

No event processing

1 channel with event processing

2 channels with event processing

3 channels with event processing

4 channels with event processing

Cycle time

1 ms

1.15 ms

1.30 ms

1.45 ms

1.60 ms

Illustration

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

Cycle time independent of the number of inputs used

72

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoot

Introduction

Measurement zones

The TSX AEY 420 module provides a choice of 6 voltage or current ranges for each of its inputs.

For the selected range, the module monitors over/undershoot: it checks that the measurement is between a lower and upper limit.

This check is optional.

Generally speaking, the module will authorize an overshoot of 5% on the positive electrical part of the range.

The measurement range is divided into five zones: lower limit

Lower value in range

Upper value in range upper limit undershoot zone lower tolerance zone nominal zone upper tolerance zone overshoot zone l l l l l the nominal zone is the measurement range corresponding to the range selected, the upper tolerance zone comprises the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit, the lower tolerance zone comprises the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

73

Racked analog modules

Over/undershoot indications

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement device saturation. To overcome this risk with a user program the following error bits can be used: .

Bit name

%IWxy.i.1:X5

%IWxy.i.1:X6

%IWxy.i.2:X1

%Ixy.ERR

Meaning (when =1)

The value read is in the lower tolerance zone.

The value read is in the upper tolerance zone.

If overshoot monitoring is required, this bit signals that the value read is in one of the two overshoot zones. l l

%MWxy.i.2:X14 signals an undershoot in the lower zone,

%MWxy.i.2:X15 signals an overshoot in the upper zone.

Channel fault.

Note: If an overshoot occurs, the value measured is limited to the corresponding limit value.

Over/undershoot limit values

Range

-

Bipolar

+/-10V

The overshoot or undershoot values can be configured (See Modifying overshoot

monitoring and event processing selection, p. 193) independently of each other.

They can take integer values between the following values:

Unipolar

0..10V,0..5V,1..5V,0..20m

A,4..20mA

Standardized

User-defined Bipolar

+/-10V

User-defined Unipolar

0..10V,0..5V,1..5V,0..20m

A,4..20mA

Lower tolerance zone

Default value

Max. value

-0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

-0.125 x

∆ gamme

-1250

-0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

-0.125 x

∆ gamme

0

0

0

0

0

Min. value

-0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

-0.25 x

∆ gamme

-2500

-0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

-0.25 x

∆ gamme

Upper tolerance zone

Default value Min. value

0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

0

0.125 x

∆ gamme

0

1250

0.125 x

∆ gamme /2

0.125 x

∆ gamme

0

0

0

Max. value

0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

0.25 x

∆ gamme

2500

0.25 x

∆ gamme /2

0.25 x

∆ gamme

With ∆ gamme = Upper range value - lower range value,

74

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Thresholds and Event Processing

At a Glance

Event causes

The TSX AEY 420 module manages 2 thresholds per channel (threshold 0 and 1).

When these thresholds are crossed, the module can trigger an event processing operation.

The user assigns an event processing operation to an analog channel when configuring the module software (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event

processing selection, p. 193).

The event can be raised in a variety of ways: the measurement taken is lower than threshold 0 the measurement taken is higher than threshold 0 the measurement taken is lower than threshold 1 the measurement taken is higher than threshold 1

Masking event triggers

These triggers can be masked or enabled by program using %Qwxy.i word bits.

Address

%QWxy.i:X 0

%QWxy.i:X 1

%QWxy.i:X 2

%QWxy.i:X 3

Function (0 = masking, 1 = enabling)

Rising threshold 0 crossing

Descending threshold 0 crossing

Rising threshold 1 crossing

Descending threshold 1 crossing

Event source The source of the event is indicated by %Iwxy.i.2 word bits:

Address

%IWxy.i.2:X0

%IWxy.i.2:X1

%IWxy.i.2:X2

%IWxy.i.2:X3

Function (1= event, 0= no event)

Rising threshold 0 crossing

Descending threshold 0 crossing

Rising threshold 1 crossing

Descending threshold 1 crossing

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

75

Racked analog modules

Example

%QWxy.0:X0

%QWxy.0:X1

%QWxy.0:X2

%QWxy.0:X3

Threshold 1

Threshold 0

Additional information

76

Evt

%IWxy.0.2:X0

%IWxy.0.2:X1

Evt

%IWxy.0.2:X2

Evt

Evt

%IWxy.0.2:X3 l l l l

The %Iwxy.i.2 input word is only updated each time a new event is raised.

When the value measured is equal to the threshold but does not exceed it, no event is raised.

The event processing operation can be activated or deactivated by configuring each channel accordingly.

An event number (0 to 63) is assigned to each channel. The number selected determines the event priority (0=maximum priority, 1 to 63=minimum priority).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Displaying measurements

Introduction

Standardized display

User display

The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, l l who can choose between: using standardized display 0..10000 (or +/-10000 for the range +/ 10 V), creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and maximum values required.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/

°°°

).

Type of range Display unipolar range bipolar range from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to +10.000 °/ from -10000 to 10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

°°°

).

to +10000 °/

°°°

).

The user can select the value range (See Modifying the display format of an input

channel as voltage or as current, p. 185) in which the measurements are expressed,

by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 °/

°°°

(or -10000 °/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum +10000 °/

°°°

.

These minimum and maximum limits should be integers within the range -30000 to

+30000.

Example:

Suppose that a conditioning unit indicates pressure on a loop of 4-20mA, where

4mA corresponds to 3200mB and 20mA corresponds to 9600mB. The user can, therefore, select the User display format, defining the following minimum and maximum limits:

3200 °/

°°°

for 3200 mB as minimum limit,

9600 °/

°°°

for 9600 mB as maximum limit,

Values sent to the program will change between 3200 (=4mA) and 9600 (=20mA).

The corresponding values are as follows:

Value of pressure Value transmitted to program

Value of current

3200 current value

9600

4 mA between 4 and 20mA

20 mA

3200 mB current value

9600 mB

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

77

Racked analog modules

Sensor alignment for the TSX AEY 420 module

Introduction

Illustration

Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor with respect to a given operating parameter. The system compensates an error linked to the process. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or a change of operating parameter of an existing sensor will require realignment.

The conversion process is as follows:

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

Example

Alignment values

For example, supposing that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/ mB), indicates 3200 mB, while the actual pressure is 3210 mB. The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10 on any new measurement. The alignment value which must be entered is 3210.

The alignment value can be modified (See

Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from

the PL7 screens, even when the program is in RUN mode.

For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.

The alignment offset can also be modified by program.

Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel function modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed 1000.

The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.

Note: bit %IWxy.i.1:X0 = 1 indicates that the channel has been aligned.

78

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

2.6

Racked analog modules

TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 modules

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TSX ASY 410 and TSX ASY 800 rack modules.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module

Characteristics of the outputs

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module

Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs

Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module

Output characteristics

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module

Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module

Page

80

82

83

85

86

88

89

90

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

79

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX ASY 410 module

General

Overview

The TSX ASY 410 module comprises 4 separately insulated analog outputs.

Depending on the selection made at configuration, (See Modifying the range of an

input or output of an analog module, p. 183) for each of its inputs, the module offers

ranges: l l l

+/-10V,

0..20 mA,

4..20 mA.

The TSX ASY 410 output module performs the following functions:

TSX ASY 410

Optocouplers

Voltage / Current

X bus interface

Processing

Optocouplers

Insulation 1500 Vrm s

N/A

Optocouplers

N/A

Optocouplers

N/A

6

5 V

5 4

Optocouplers

DC / DC converter couplers

3

7

N/A

2 1 Function

80

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Description Details of the functions are as follows:

Address

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Function

Link to process

Adapting to different actuators

Conversion of digital data into analog signals

Characteristics l l l l l physical link to the process via a 20-pin screw terminal block,

Protection of the module against voltage surges.

Adaptation is performed in terms of voltage or current.

conversion is performed over 11 bits with sign (-2048 to 2047), data supplied by the program is recentered automatically in the converter dynamic,

Transformation of application values to data that can be used by the digital/analog converter

-

Communication interface with application l l l l management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, receipt of module and channel configuration parameters from the application, as well as digital channel setpoints, transmission of module status to the application.

Module power supply

Module surveillance and notification of possible errors on the application

l l l l

24V external supply for outputs converter test, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

Output updating The maximum time between the output value being sent to the PLC bus and its final positioning on the terminal block is 2.5 ms.

Outputs can be individually assigned to the MAST or FAST tasks of the application program.

Output writing The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: l l

-10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V,

0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

These values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 3 for channels 0 to 3 of the module.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

81

Racked analog modules

Characteristics of the outputs

Output writing

Digital / analog conversion

The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: l l

-10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V,

0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

The values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 3 for channels 0 to 3 of the module.

Digital / analog conversion is performed on: l 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047).

Re-scaling of the data, provided by the program, in the converter dynamics is done automatically

Forcing outputs Each output can be forced using the PLC Debugging screen to a value between

10000 and +10000, defined by the user. This function is essentially dedicated to testing the wiring system.

Forcing cannot be accessed unless the program task which controls the outputs is in RUN mode (with the output in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task is in STOP mode).

82

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 410 module

Introduction The type of under/overshoot monitoring on the TSX ASY 410 module depends on the software version (the software version is indicated on the module reference label, affixed to the side panel of the product, or accessible via PL7 in connected mode).

For modules with the SV<=1.0 software version

If the values given by the application are less that –10000 or greater than +10000, the outputs saturate at the following value: l l l

-10 V or +10 V in range +/-10 V,

4 mA or 20 mA in range 4..20 mA,

0 mA or 20 mA in range 0..20 mA.

An overshoot fault is signaled by the following bits (usable by the program):

Bit name

%Ixy.i.ERR

%IWxy.i.2:X1

Meaning

When = 1, Indicates a channel error.

When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel.

For modules with the SV>=2.0 software version

These modules allow an over/undershoot of: l l

+/-5 % on voltage ranges and 4..20 mA,

+5 % on the range 0..20 mA.

The measurement range is divided into three zones: lower limit upper limit undershoot zone nominal zone overshoot zone l the nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected, l l the the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

Overshoot values in relation to range:

Range

+/-10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

Lower limit

-10500 (i.e. –10.5 V)

0 (i.e. 0mA)

-500 (i.e. 3.2 mA)

Upper limit

+10500 (i.e. +10.5 V).

+10500 (i.e. +21 mA).

+10500 (i.e. +20.8 mA).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

83

Racked analog modules

Range overshoot detection is optional:

The user can select (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing

selection, p. 193) whether overshoot, undershoot or both are to be indicated.

When the value sent is outside the over/undershoot limits and the over/undershoot monitor is requested, the over/undershoots are signaled by the following bits:

Address

%Ixy.i.ERR

Meaning

When = 1, Indicates a channel error

%MWxy.i.2:X1 When = 1, Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel.

l l

%MWxy.i.2:X3 = 1 indicates overshoot by a greater value,

%MWxy.i.2:X3 = 0 indicates undershoot by a lower value.

84

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Behavior of the TSX ASY 410 module outputs

Fallback/

Maintain or clearing outputs

When a fault occurs, depending on the gravity of the fault, the outputs shift individually or as a group to the Fallback/Maintain position or they are forced to 0 (0

V or 0 mA).

Different cases of output behavior:

Fault

Task in STOP mode or program missing

Communication fault

Configuration fault

Internal module fault

Output value outside limits

(range overshoot)

Software version>=2.0

Output value outside limits

(range overshoot)

Software version=1.0

Terminal block fault

Plugging in on power-up

Processor in STOP mode

Reloading program

Voltage output behavior

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

0V (channel by channel)

0V (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to +10.5/-10.5V

(channel by channel)

+10V/-10V

Current output behavior

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

0mA (channel by channel)

0mA (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to 3.2/20.8 mA or

0/20mA

4/20 mA or 0/20mA

Value maintain (all channels) Value maintain (all channels)

Outputs to 0 (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

Fallback or maintain at the current value is selected on configuration of the module.

The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Debugging (See Modifying the

fallback value of an output, p. 211) screen or by program.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

85

Racked analog modules

Introducing the TSX ASY 800 module

General The TSX ASY 800 module comprises 8 non-insulated analog outputs. Depending l l l on the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the range of an input or

output of an analog module, p. 183), for each of its inputs, the module offers ranges:

+/-10V,

0..20 mA,

4..20 mA.

The TSX ASY 800 output module performs the following functions: Overview

TSX ASY 800

Optocoupler

6

5

Processing

Optocoupler

D/A

4

DC/DC

Converter

7

3 2 1

8

86

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Description Details of the functions are as follows:

Address Element

1

2

3

4 Transformation of application values to data that can be used by the digital/analog converter

Function

Link to process l l physical connection to the process via a 25 pin SubD connector, protection of the module against voltage surges.

Adapting to different actuators l Adaptation is performed in terms of voltage or current.

Conversion of digital data into analog signals l l in terms of voltage, conversion is performed on 13 bits sign + (-

8192 to +8191), in terms of current, conversion is performed on 13 bits (0 to +8191).

-

5

6

7

8

Communication interface with application l

l l l management of exchanges with the processor, geographical addressing, reception of module and channel configuration parameters from the application, as well as digital channel setpoints, transmission of module status to the application.

Module power supply

Module surveillance and notification of possible errors to the application l l l l

24V external supply for outputs converter test, testing for range under/overshoot on channels, testing for presence of terminal block, testing watchdog.

Output refresh period

The maximum time between the output value being sent to the PLC bus and its final positioning on the terminal block is 5 ms.

Action on external supply fault on outputs

If there is an external supply fault on the outputs, all outputs on the TSX ASY 800 module are set to 0.

Note: When the module has both an external supply fault and a terminal block fault, only the supply fault is signaled.

Output writing The application must provide the outputs with values in the standard format: l l

-10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V,

0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

These values must be written in the words %Qwy.i.0 to 7 for channels 0 to 7 of the module.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

87

Racked analog modules

Output characteristics

Writing output

Digital / analog conversion

The application must provide values in a standardized format to the outputs: l l

-10000 to +10000 in range +/-10 V,

0 to +10000 in ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

The values must be written in the words %QWxy.i.0 to 7 for channels 0 to 7 in the module.

Digital / analog conversion is carried out on: l l

13 bits + sign (-8192 to +8191) in voltage,

13 bits (0 to +8191) in current.

Re-scaling of the data, provided by the program, in the converter dynamics is done automatically.

Forcing the outputs

From the PL7 Debugging screen, each output can be forced to a value between –

10000 and +10000, as defined by the user. Essentially, this function is dedicated to testing the wiring.

Forcing can only be accessed if the program task controlling the output is in RUN mode (the output being in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task in

STOP mode).

What happens with an output external supply fault

With output external supply fault all the module outputs switch to 0.

Note: When the module has an external supply fault and a terminal block fault at the same time, only the supply fault is signaled.

88

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked analog modules

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TSX ASY 800 module

Introduction

Measurement zones

The TSX ASY 800 module supports an under/overshoot of +/-5% on the voltage ranges and 4..20mA and +5% on the current range.

Under/overshoot detection is optional.

The measurement range is divided into three zones: lower limit upper limit

Overshoot indications undershoot zone nominal zone overshoot zone l l l the nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

The overshoot or undershoot values for different ranges are as follows:

Range

+/-10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

Lower limit

-10500 (i.e. –10.5 V)

0 (i.e. 0mA)

-500 (i.e. 3.2 mA)

Upper limit

+10500 (i.e. +10.5 V)

+10500 (i.e. +21 mA)

+10500 (i.e. +20.8 mA)

The user can select (See Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing

selection, p. 193)whether overshoot, undershoot or both are to be indicated.

When the overshoot control is requested, the following bits signal the indications:

Bit name

%Ixy.i.ERR

%MWxy.i.2:X1

Meaning

When = 1, Indicates a channel error

When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel.

l l

%MWxy.i.2:X3 = 1 indicates overshoot by a greater value,

%MWxy.i.2:X3 = 0 indicates undershoot by a lower value.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

89

Racked analog modules

Behavior of the outputs of the TSX ASY 800 module

Fallback/

Maintain or clearing outputs

Fault

Task in STOP mode or program missing

Communication fault

Configuration fault

Internal module fault

Output value outside limits

(range overshoot)

Terminal block fault

Plugging in on power-up

Processor in STOP mode

Reloading program

When a fault occurs, depending on the gravity of the fault, the outputs shift individually or as a group to the Fallback/Maintain position or they are forced to 0 (0

V or 0 mA).

Different cases of output behavior:

Current output behavior

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

Voltage output behavior

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

0V (channel by channel)

0V (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to

+10.5/-10.5V (channel by channel)

Value maintain (all channels)

Outputs to 0 V (all channels)

0 V (all channels)

Fallback/Maintain (channel by channel)

0mA (channel by channel)

0mA (channel by channel)

Value transmitted with saturation to 3.2/

20.8 mA or 0/20mA

Value maintain (all channels)

0 mA (all channels)

0 mA (all channels)

Fallback or maintain at the current value is selected on configuration of the module.

The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Debugging (See Modifying the

fallback value of an output, p. 211) screen or by program.

Behavior on power-up

On power-up of the module (powering up the rack or plugging in on power-up), the outputs are fixed at 0V/0mA for one second before becoming operational.

This time period is needed to stabilize the output power supply.

90

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The remote analog TBX modules

3

At a Glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the remote analog TBX modules.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

3.1

3.2

3.3

Topic

TBX AES 400 Module

TBX AMS 620 Module

TBX ASS 200 Module

Page

92

104

117

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

91

analog TBXs

3.1

TBX AES 400 Module

At a Glance

What’s in this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TBX AES 400 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TBX AES 400 module

Timing of measurements

Monitoring under/overshoot

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module

Sensor alignment

Page

93

95

96

98

99

101

103

92

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX AES 400 module

General

Overview

The TBX AES 400 base is an analog input module containing 4 insulated multiple l l l l range channels. It must be connected to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.

This module supports the following ranges on each input:

High-level voltage,

High-level current,

Thermocouples (B, E ,J, K, N, R, S, T),

Thermowells (Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000).

TBX AES 400 input module connected to the TBX LEP 030 :

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Analog/

Digital

Conversion

2

Processes (in chronological order:

-range selection

-overshoot

-sensor check

-filtering

-linearization

-display

Measure

Channel

Channel 0

24/48V

Time

Base

1

Cold junction temperature

3 4 5 6 7

Supply

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

93

analog TBXs

Description The TBX AES 400 module connected to the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:

Address Function

1 l acquisition by relay multiplexing of the 4 channels with 50 Hz or 60 Hz rejection,

2

3

4

5

6

7 l l l l l l l l

12 bit + sign analog digital conversion, range selection for each input: voltage, current or thermocouple, input under/overshoot check, sensor check, measurement filtering, linearization and cold junction compensation for thermocouples, linearization for thermowells, user-defined measurement formatting.

94

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Timing of measurements

Introduction

Breakdown of the cycle time

The cycle length (time) for the TBX AES 400 module depends on the electricity network frequency (50Hz or 60Hz) and therefore on the rejection mode selected upon configuration.

The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 then acquisition of the module’s cold junction temperature.

Illustration of the cycle time

Channel 1

Channel 0

Channel 3

Channel 2 T cj

Channel 1 Channel 3

Channel 0 Channel 2 T cj

T channel

T cycle

T cj: time to acquire the cold junction temperature

The table below shows the various terms of the calculation.

Type of time

Scanning time for a channel

Acquisition time for the cold junction temperature

Acquisition time for a complete cycle

50 Hz rejection

80 ms

80 ms

400 ms

60 Hz rejection

68 ms

68 ms

340 ms

Note: l l

The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use,

The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends on the transmission times on the FIPIO bus and on the PLC task period.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

95

analog TBXs

Monitoring under/overshoot

Introduction

Measurement zone

The TBX AES 400 module provides a choice of voltage ranges, current ranges, thermocouple ranges and thermowell ranges for each input.

The module checks for an under/overshoot corresponding to the selected range: it checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit.

The measurement range is divided into five zones: undershoot limit nominal zone overshoot limit l l l l l undershoot zone Lower tolerance zone

Upper tolerance zone overshoot zone

The nominal zone is the measurement range that corresponds to the range selected, the upper tolerance zone contains the values between the upper value of the range (e.g.: +10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the upper limit, the lower tolerance zone contains the values between the lower value of the range (e.g.: -10V for a range -10V/+10V) and the lower limit, the overshoot zone is the zone above the upper range limit, the undershoot zone is the zone below the lower range limit.

Under/overshoot indications

If the values supplied by the application fall outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded and under/overshoot is indicated by:

The module continues to supply the converted value until saturation of the converter or of the display format (+32767/-32768), even though the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.

The user can use the under/overshoot bit as a means of eliminating these measurements.

Under/overshoot bit:

Address

%I\p.2.c\m.i.ERR

Meaning

When = 1, Indicates a range overshoot/undershoot on the channel

Electrical range under/overshoot values

For voltage ranges, the module allows an overshoot of 5% on the positive part of the range.

96

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Electrical ranges:

Range

+/-10 V

+/-5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

-20..+20 mV

-50..+50 mV

-200..+200 mV

-500..+500 mV

Lower limit

-10.5 V

-5.25 V

-1 mA

+3.2 mA

-21 mV

-52.5 mV

-210 mV

-525 mV

Upper limit

+10.5 V

+5.25 V

+21 mA

+20.8 mA

+21 mV

+52.5 mV

+210 mV

+525 mV

Thermal range under/overshoot values

The range under/overshoot corresponds either to a dynamic under/overshoot of the acquisition string or to an under/overshoot of the standardized sensor measurement

°

°

Thermocouple ranges:

Range

Thermo B

Lower limit

Thermo E

Thermo J

Thermo K

Thermo N

Thermo R

Thermo S

Thermo T

°

°

°

°

°

°

Upper limit

°

°

°

°

°

°

Thermowell range:

Range

Pt100

Pt1000

Ni1000

Lower limit

°

°

° °

°

°

Upper limit

°

°

°

°

°

°

97

analog TBXs

Measurement filtering

Introduction

Mathematical formula

Values for the

TBX AEY 400 module

The system uses first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog

module channels, p. 189).

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.

On configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values.

The filter values are as follows. They are dependent on the power voltage:

Efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

4

High filtering 5

6

0

1

2

Correspo nding

α value

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Rejection time constant at 50 Hz

Rejection time constant at 60 Hz

0

1.6 s

3.2 s

6.4 s

12.8 s

25.6 s

51.2 s

0

1.4s

2.7s

5.4 s

10.8 s

21.1 s

43.5 s

98

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Displaying measurements

Introduction This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.

It is necessary to differentiate between the electric ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.

Standardized display of electrical ranges

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/

°°°

):

Type of range Display unipolar range

0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range

+/-10V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°° from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

°°°

)

)

to +10.000 °/

User-defined display of electrical ranges

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/

The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.

°°°

.

Example:

Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.

The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display: l l for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.

The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.

Illustration

Pressure

20.000 bars

2.000 bars

20 mA

Current

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

99

analog TBXs

Displaying thermocouple and thermowell ranges

With the temperature display format, values are provided in tenths of a degree.

With user display, the user can select standardized display 0..10000 by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, who can choose between standardized and temperature display formats.

Example:

Thermocouple J connected to a TBX AES 400 module. The user wishes to monitor a temperature range from 200 °C to 600 °C and obtain a result expressed as a percentage of the dynamic range.

In order to do this, select a standardized display format and define the limits: l l lower limit = 2000, upper limit = 6000.

The measurement accessible by program then falls between 0 and 10000.

For a temperature of 400°C, the module supplies a digital value equal to 5000 as the measurement, i.e. 50 % of the input dynamic range.

Illustration:

Displayed measurement value

%

100.00

50.00

0

200 400 600 T in degrees Celsius

100

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module

Introduction Calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is performed

globally for the module on channel 0.

It is advisable to calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP modes.

l l

Calibration consists of two steps: calibration of the zero value, full scale calibration.

Calibration of the zero value

Calibration of the zero value is recommended for ranges +/-20mV, +/-50mV and thermocouple ranges. It involves simultaneously calibrating the zero value of each channel in range +/- 20 mV to the required ambient temperature by placing shunts directly on the input limits of the base unit.

Full scale calibration

Precautions

Full scale calibration is performed on channel 0 by placing the adjusted calibration source at full scale +/-0,01% directly on the input limits of channel 0 of the base unit.

When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid, filtering and alignment is prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.

As inputs other than channel 0 will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before commencing calibration.

How to calibrate the module

The following table shows the module calibration procedure:

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen.

Double-click on channel 0.

Result : The system asks for confirmation ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Place a shunt on all the module inputs to perform calibration at 0.

Reply Yes to the previous question (reply No to avoid performing calibration at 0).

Result : The calibration window appears.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

101

analog TBXs

Step

5

6

7

8

Action

Perform full scale calibration.

Connect a reference voltage on the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be calibrated: l reference voltage = 10 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges 10 V and 0..10 V, l reference voltage = 5 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, l reference voltage = 2 V (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges Pt1000 and Ni1000, l reference voltage = 500 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on range 500 mV, l reference voltage = 200 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges Pt100 and +/- 200 mV, l reference voltage = 50 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples E, J, K and N, l reference voltage = 20 mV (+/- 0.01% precision) in order to calibrate the module on ranges +/- 200 mV and thermocouples B, R, S and T.

Caution: the reference 5 V is used to recalibrate the whole measurement channel for ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, with the exception of the 250 Ohm current shunt situated on the current entry.

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), select the value from the Reference drop-down list box. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference (e.g. 10 V and 0..10 V) are then calibrated automatically.

Calibrate the module for any other ranges in use.

the Return to Factory Settings command button will cancel all previous calibrations, and return the module to the calibration settings configured in the factory.

Click on the Save command button in order to take into account and save the new calibration in the module. If an attempt is made to exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost.

102

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Sensor alignment

Introduction Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed with a given sensor in relation to a given operating parameter. The system compensates an error linked to the process. For this reason, replacing a module will not require realignment, whereas the replacement of a sensor or modification of the operating parameter of this sensor will require realignment.

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

Example

Alignment values

Supposing that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates

3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.

The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required).

After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value which must be entered is 3210.

The alignment value can be changed (See

Aligning an input channel, p. 210) from

the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.

For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel is already aligned.

The alignment offset can also be modified by program.

Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) should not exceed 1000.

The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

103

analog TBXs

3.2

TBX AMS 620 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TBX AMS 620 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module

Timing of measurements on inputs

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs

Filtering of measurements on inputs

Displaying measurements on inputs

Characteristics of the outputs

Fault handling

Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs

Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module

Sensor alignment

Page

105

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

104

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX AMS 620 module

General The TBX AMS 620 base unit is an analog output module containing 6 high-level noninsulated channels and 2 insulated outputs. It must be associated to a TBX LEP 030 communicator.

l l

This module supports the following ranges on each input :

High-level voltage,

High-level current.

l l

This module supports the following ranges on each output :

High-level voltage,

High-level current.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

105

analog TBXs

Overview Overview of the TBX AMS 620 module associated to the TBX LEP 030 communicator: processor

Input 0

Input 1

Channel 1

Channel 0

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

1

Analog

Digital conversion

2

Processes:

- range selection

- overshoot

- filtering

- display

6

4

5

3

Channel 7

Channel 6

Bus interface

Time base

FIPIO

Output 0

Output 1

Channel 6

Channel 7

Digital

Analog conversion

10

Processes:

- refreshing

- error handling

- range selection

8

7

9

24/48V

Supply

106

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description analog TBXs

The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following input functions :

Address Function

1

2

3

4

5

6 l l l l l l acquisition of the 6 channels using multiplexing,

12 bit + sign analog digital conversion, range selection for each input: voltage, current, thermocouple, input under/overshoot monitoring, measurement filtering, user-defined measurement formatting.

The TBX AMS 620 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following output functions:

8

9

Address Function

7 refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor,

10 processing PLC dialog faults, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

107

analog TBXs

Timing of measurements on inputs

Introduction

Breakdown of the cycle time

The cycle time for the TBX AMS 620 module is fixed at 42.4 ms.

The measurements are sequenced in the following manner: channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, channel 4, channel 5 then acquisition of two internal reference voltage channels, required for cyclical calibration.

Scanning time values:

Type of time

Scanning time for a channel

Acquisition time for a complete cycle

Time l l

5.3 ms,

42.4 ms.

Illustration:

Channel 1

Channel 0

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 5

Channel 4

Int.

T channel channel

Int. channel

Channel 1

Channel 0

Channel 3

Channel 2

T cycle = 42.4 ms

Note: l l

The cycle is always identical, even when some channels are not in use,

The time required for the program to access the measurements also depends on the transmission times on the FIPIO bus and on the PLC task period.

108

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs

Introduction

Measurement zone

The TSX AMS 620 module provides a choice between voltage or current ranges.

The module checks for under/overshoot corresponding to the selected range: it checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit.

The measurement zone is in the nominal zone.

Beyond the nominal zone, under/overshoot is tolerated up to the under/overshoot limits:

Illustration: undershoot limit overshoot limit nominal zone undershoot zone overshoot zone

Under/overshoot indications

If values provided by the application fall outside the limits, then saturation will occur at the value of the limit exceeded.

The module continues to supply the converted value until saturation of the converter or of the display format (+32767/-32768), even though the validity of the measurement is not guaranteed.

The user can use the under/overshoot bit as a means of elminating these measurements.

Under/overshoot bit:

Bit name

%I\p.2.c\m.i.ERR

Meaning

When = 1, indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel.

Electrical range under/overshoot values

For voltage ranges, the module allows an overshoot of 5% on the positive electric part of the range.

Under/overshoot values according to the type of input

Range

+/-10 V

0..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

Lower limit

-10.5 V

Upper limit

+10.5 V.

0 V: this under/overshoot cannot be detected +5.25 V.

0 V: this under/overshoot cannot be detected +21 mA.

+3.2 mA +20.8 mA.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

109

analog TBXs

Filtering of measurements on inputs

Introduction

Mathematical formula

Values for the

TBX AMS 620 module

The system uses first order filtering. The filter coefficient can be modified from a programming terminal and by program (See Modifying the filter value of analog

module channels, p. 189).

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α =filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.

On configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values.

The filter values are as follows:

Efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

4

High filtering 5

6

0

1

2

Value to be selected

Corresponding

0 s

170 ms

339 ms

678 ms

1.35 s

2.71 s

5.42 s

α

time constant

0

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

110

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Displaying measurements on inputs

Introduction This process is used to select the display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program.

Standardized display of electrical ranges

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/

°°°

):

Type of range Display unipolar range

0-10V, 0-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA bipolar range

+/-10V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°° from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

°°°

).

).

to +10.000 °/

User-defined display of electrical ranges

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum: 0 (or - 10000 °/

°°°

), l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum: + 10000 °/

The minimum and maximum limits are between -31128 and +31128.

°°°

.

Example:

Use of a 2/20 bar pressure sensor supplying a 0/20 mA signal and having a linear characteristic.

The user is interested in the pressure rather than the current value. The best resolution is obtained by selecting user display: l l for minimum limit: 2000, for maximum limit: 20000.

The user-program then uses values expressed directly in the physical unit, the millibar.

Illustration:

Pressure

20.000 bars

2.000 bars

20 mA

Current

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

111

analog TBXs

Characteristics of the outputs

Output writing

Refreshing outputs via the module

The user has access via the program to 2 words (1 16-bit word per channel) in which the values of the analog outputs are given.

l l from 0 to 10000 (that is 0 °/

4/20 mA,

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

to +10000 °/

°°°

) for bipolar range +/-10 V.

Outputs are refreshed every 5 ms

The response time between writing the output via the program and updating the outputs to the module limits depends on the PLC task period in which the module is configured.

112

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Fault handling

Dialog faults with the PLC

This type of handling groups together: l l l l l setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.

In the above cases, the user has two options for each output: maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal display limits (0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.

Internal errors in the module

When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

113

analog TBXs

Monitoring under/overshoots on the TBX AMS 620 module outputs

At a Glance

Characteristics of the ranges

The TBX AMS 620 module includes an under/overshoot monitoring device.

The limits and precisions of the various ranges are as follows:

Range

+/- 10V

0.20mA

4.20mA

Lower limit

-10000

0

0

Upper limit

+10000

+10000

+10000

Precision conversion on 11 signed bits of -

2048 to +2047 pulses conversion on 11 bits of 0 to

+2047 pulses conversion on 11 bits of 0 to

+2047 pulses

Illustration

Analog output value

+10 V

-10000

20 mA

Analog output value

10000

Numerical value

-10 V

20 mA

Analog output value

4 mA

0

10000

Numerical value

10000

Numerical value

Under/overshoot identifiers

If the values provided by the application are outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded. The overshoot is shown by:

Bit name

%I\p.2.c\m.voie.ERR

Meaning

When equal to 1, shows a range overshoot on the channel.

114

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Calibrating the TBX AMS 620 module

At a Glance Calibration (See

Calibration function for an analog module, p. 213) is carried out

globally for the module on channel 0.

It is advised that you calibrate the module outside the application. Calibration can be done with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or STOP mode. Calibration is a full scale calibration

Full scale calibration is done on the 0 channel by placing the standard reference source scaled to +/-0.01% directly on the input limits of the 0 channel of the base.

Full scale calibration

Precautions When in calibration mode, measurements for all channels in the module are declared invalid, filtering and alignment are prevented and channel acquisition cycles may be lengthened.

As inputs other than the 0 channel will not be acquired during calibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value that was measured before switching to calibration.

How to calibrate the module

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

The following table shows the procedure for calibrating the module:

Action

Access the calibration adjustment screen

Double click on the 0 channel.

Result : A question appears ‘Do you wish to switch to recalibration mode?’.

Reply to this question with Yes .

Result : The calibration window appears.

Then perform the full scale calibration.

According to the range to be calibrated, connect a reference voltage to the voltage input of channel 0: l l reference voltage = 10 V (precision +/- 0.01%) in order to calibrate the module on the +/-10 V ranges reference voltage = 5 V (precision +/- 0.01%) in order to calibrate the module on the 0..5 V ranges

Once the reference has been connected to the voltage input (e.g. 10 V), use the Reference drop-down list box to select this value. Wait, if necessary, for the reference voltage connected to stabilize, then confirm the selection using the Confirm command button. The ranges linked to this reference are then calibrated automatically.

Calibrate the module for other ranges, if applicable.

the command button Return to Factory Settings allows you to cancel all calibrations previously carried out and to return the module to the initial calibration settings configured in the factory.

Click on the Save command button in order to recognize and save the new calibration in the module. If you exit the calibration screen without saving, a message is displayed indicating that the new calibration values will be lost

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

115

analog TBXs

Sensor alignment

At a Glance Alignment consists of eliminating systematic deviation observed with a given sensor around a given operating parameter. An error linked to the process is compensated for. For this reason, replacing a module does not necessitate a new alignment, whereas the replacement of the sensor or modification of the operating parameter of this sensor does necessitate a new alignment.

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

Example

Alignment values

Let us suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, whereas the actual pressure is 3210 mB.

The value measured by the module in standardized scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (value required).

After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10. The alignment value that must be entered is 3210.

The alignment value can be modified from the PL7 screen, even when the program is in RUN mode.

For each input channel, the user can: l l l view and modify the required measurement value, save the alignment value, see if the channel already possesses an alignment.

The alignment offset can also be changed by program.

Alignment is performed on the channel under normal usage, without affecting the module channel operating modes. The maximum difference between the value measured and the value required (aligned value) must not exceed 1000.

The alignment offset is stored in the word %Mwxy.i.8.

116

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

3.3

TBX ASS 200 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the TBX ASS 200 rack-based module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module

Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module

Fault handling

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module

Page

118

120

121

122

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

117

analog TBXs

Introducing the TBX ASS 200 module

General

Overview

The TBX ASS 200 base unit is an analog output module containing 2 insulated l l channels. It must be associated with a TBX LEP 030 communicator. This module offers the following ranges for each of its outputs:

Voltage: 10V,

Current: 0/20 mA and 4/20 mA.

The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions: l refreshing the digital values corresponding to the analog output values transmitted by the PLC, l l l processing dialog errors with the PLC, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.

Overview of the TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator:

Writing outputs

Channel 1

Channel 0

Output 0

Output 1

Digital

Analog

Conversion

Processes:

- refreshing

- error handling

- range selection

3

2

1

Bus interface

4

Channel 0

Channel 1

FIPIO

24/48V

Supply

118

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description analog TBXs

The TBX ASS 200 module associated with the TBX LEP 030 communicator supports the following functions:

2

3

Address Function

1 refreshing the digital values transmitted by the processor,

4 processing PLC dialog faults, range selection for each output: voltage, current, digital analog conversion.

Note: One channel can only be used in a single range, i.e. current or voltage.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

119

analog TBXs

Output characteristics for the TBX ASS 200 module

Writing outputs

Refreshing the outputs via the module

The user can access two words via the program (1 word of 16 bits per channel), where the analog output values are given. l l from 0 to 10000 (or 0 °/ mA,

°°°

à 10000 °/

°°°

) for unipolar ranges 0/20 mA and 4/20 from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

to +10.000 °/

°°°

) for bipolar range +/-10 V.

The outputs are refreshed every 5 ms

The response time between the output write via the program and updating the output at the module terminals depends on the period of the PLC task where the module is configured.

120

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

analog TBXs

Fault handling

Dialog faults with the PLC

This type of handling groups together: l l l l l setting the PLC to STOP mode (or the task in which the module is configured), a PLC fault, a link fault between the PLC and the module.

In the above cases, the user has two options for each output: maintain the output at the current value, fallback to a defined value. The value must be selected between the normal display limits (0/10000) for unipolar ranges or –10000/10000 for the voltage range. By default, the module is configured in fallback to 0 mode.

Internal errors in the module

When the module has an internal error the outputs are forced to 0.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

121

analog TBXs

Monitoring under/overshoots for the TBX ASS 200 module

Introduction

Range characteristics

The TBX ASS 200 module contains an under/overshoot monitoring device.

The limits and specifications for the different ranges are as follows:

Range

+/-10V

0.20mA

0

4.20mA

0

Lower limit Upper limit

-10000 +10000

+10000

+10000

Precision conversion on 11 bits + sign from -2048 to +2047 points.

conversion on 11 bits from 0 to +2047 points.

conversion on 11 bits from 0 to +2047 points.

Illustration

Analog output value

+10 V

Overshoot indications

-10000

20 mA

Analog output value

10000

Numerical value

-10 V

20 mA

Analog output value

4 mA

0

10000

Numerical value

10000

Numerical value

If the values supplied by the application fall outside the limits, saturation occurs at the value of the limit exceeded. Overshoot is indicated by:

Bit name Meaning

%I\p.2.c\m.channel.ERR

When = 1, Indicates a range over/undershoot on the channel.

122

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The remote analog Momentum modules

4

At a Glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the remote analog Momentum modules.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

Topic

170 AAI 030 00 module

170 AAI 140 00 Module

170 AAI 520 40 Module

170 AAO 120 00 Module

170 AAO 921 00 Module

170 AMM 090 00 module

Page

124

128

134

141

146

151

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

123

Analog Momentums

4.1

170 AAI 030 00 module

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This Section introduces the AAI 030 00 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module

Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module

Page

125

126

124

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Introduction to the 170 AAI 030 00 module

General The 170 AAI 030 00 analog base features eight isolated inputs. l l l l l

It can be configured according to the following ranges:

+/- 10 V,

+/-5 V,

1…5 V,

+/-20 mA,

4.20 mA.

Configuration of the base

The base uses: l 8 adjacent input words, to send the input analog values of the base to the l processor module,

2 adjacent output words, to define the parameters of each of the 8 inputs.

Note: The 8 analog inputs must be parametered before the base is brought into service.

Conversion time The conversion time depends on the number of declared inputs. A set time is to be systematically added.

Time value:

Type

Conversion time of an input

Set time

Value

1.33 ms

1.33 ms

Illustration

T fixed

Channel 1 Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 5

Channel 4

Channel 7

Channel 6 Channel 8

1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms 1,33ms

Maximum time for 8 declared inputs: 12 ms

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

125

Analog Momentums

Words for the 170 AAI 030 00 module

Input values The analog values in input are read or written in one word per channel. Therefore, the 170 AAI 030 00 base uses 8 adjacent words. The sign is always assigned to bit

15 of the word.

The value is left-justified.

The representation format is binary 2’s complement.

The digital/analog conversion is carried out on 12 bits + polarity sign.

The bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. As a result, the read value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

Illustration:

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 to

Sign Value of input 1 Always at 0

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.7

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 8 Always at 0

126

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Parameters

Analog Momentums

These words are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of words to configure the operating mode for the inputs. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.

The order of the nibbles is as follows:

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.5

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5

The value of each nibble is coded according to the following rules:

Nibble value (in binary)

2#0000

2#0010 2

2#0011 3

2#0100 4

2#1001

Value in Hex.

0

9

Meaning reserved

+/-5 VDC and +/-20 mA

+/-10 VDC

1...5 VDC and 4...20 mA

Note: Any value apart from those indicated in the table above is prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

127

Analog Momentums

4.2

170 AAI 140 00 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the 170 AAI 140 00 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module

170 AAI 140 00 module words

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module

Page

129

130

132

128

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAI 140 00 module

General The analog base unit 170 AAI 140 00 has 16 common point inputs which are mutually non-insulated.

It can be used for continuous process monitoring, measuring and regulation functions.

l l l

This module also monitors wire breaking.

It can be configured according to the following ranges:

+/-10 V,

+/-5 V,

4.20 mA.

Configuration of the base unit

The base unit uses: l 16 contiguous input words, to send the analog values input at the base unit back to the processor module, l 4 contiguous output words, to define the parameters of each of the 16 inputs.

Note: The 16 analog inputs must have parameters before the base unit is put into service.

Conversion time The conversion time depends on the number of registered inputs. A fixed time is added systematically.

Time values:

Type

Conversion time for an input

Fixed time

Value

1.5 ms

1.5 ms

Illustration

Channel 1

T fixed

Channel 3

Channel 2

Channel 5

Channel 4

1ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms

Channel 15

Channel 14 Channel 16

1,5ms 1,5ms 1,5ms

Maximum time for 16 declared inputs: 25 ms

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

129

Analog Momentums

170 AAI 140 00 module words

Input values The input analog values are read or written in one word per channel. The base unit

170 AAI 140 00 therefore use 16 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.

The value is left justified.

The representation format is binary, two’s complement.

Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (bipolar ranges).

Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

Illustration:

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 1 Always at 0 to

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.15

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 16 Always at 0

130

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Parameters

Analog Momentums

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of words to configure the input operating mode. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.

The nibbles are in the following order:

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.20

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.21

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.22

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 12 Channel 11 Channel 10 Channel 9

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.23

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 16 Channel 15 Channel 14 Channel 13

The value of each quartet is encoded according to the following rules:

Nibble value (binary)

2#0000

2#1010

2#1011

2#1100 C

2#1110 E

A

B

Value in Hexa

0

Meaning reserved.

+/-5 VDC.

+/-10 VDC.

4..20 mA.

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are forbidden. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

131

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 140 00 module

Range +/-10V

Range +/-5V

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage, is determined by the formula:

Vn = 3200 x Va (in volts).

Illustration:

Vn

32767

32000

-10.2397 V -10 V

10 V

10.2397 V

Va

-32000

-32767

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage, is determined by the formula:

Vn = 6400 x Va (Va in volts).

Illustration:

Vn

32767

32000

-5,1198 V -5 V

5 V

5,1198 V

Va

-32000

-32767

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

132

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Range 4...20 mA In current range 3.6165 … 20.3835 mA, the value transmitted by the base unit, based on the input current (Ia) is determined by the formula:

Vn = 2000 x Ia - 8000 (Ia in mA).

Illustration:

Vn

32767

32000

-1 mA +1 mA

+4 mA

-767

+20 mA +20,3835 mA

Ia

-32767

Reminder: the resolution is on 12

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

133

Analog Momentums

4.3

170 AAI 520 40 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the 170 AAI 520 40 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module

170 AAI 520 40 module words

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module

Page

135

136

140

134

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAI 520 40 module

General The base unit 170 AAI 520 40 has four differential analog inputs. The inputs associated with the thermowells or thermocouples, support temperature monitoring, measurement and regulation functions. They can also be configured as voltage inputs in mV.

l l l l l

The base unit recognizes wire breaks.

This base unit has 4 analog inputs which can be configured with the following ranges:

+/-100 mV,

+/-25 mV,

Temperature probe Pt100, Pt1000,

Temperature probe Ni100 or Ni1000,

Thermocouple B, E, J, K, N, R, S or T.

Configuration of the base unit

The base unit uses: l 4 contiguous input words, to send the analog values at the inputs of the base unit back to the processor module, l 4 contiguous output words, to define the parameters of each of the 4 inputs.

Note: The 16 analog inputs must be assigned parameters before the base unit is put into service.

Conversion time The conversion time is independent of the number of registered inputs.

Conversion time = 500ms

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

135

Analog Momentums

170 AAI 520 40 module words

Input values The input analog values are read or written in one word per channel. The base unit

170 AAI 520 40 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.

The value is left justified.

The representation format is binary, two’s complement.

Analog digital conversion is performed on 15 bits + polarity sign.

Illustration:

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 to

Sign Value of input 1

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 4

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of words, to configure the input operation mode. The parameter corresponds: to the type of sensor, to the selected unit of temperature, to the need for a wiring check.

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

to

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.7

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel parameters

Thermocouple ranges:

Range Temperature

Thermocouple B 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Wiring check inactive active inactive active

Parameter word

(hexa)

2201

2301

2281

2381

136

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Range Temperature

Thermocouple E 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple J 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple K 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple N 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple R 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple S 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Thermocouple T 1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

Wiring check inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active

Analog Momentums

2287

2387

2208

2308

2288

2388

1285

1385

2206

2306

2286

2386

2207

2307

1283

1383

1204

1304

1284

1384

1205

1305

Parameter word

(hexa)

1202

1302

1282

1382

1203

1303

137

Analog Momentums

138

Ranges PT100, PT1000, Ni 100 and Ni 1000:

Range Cabling Temperature

IEC PT100 RTD

IEC PT1000 RTD

2 or 4 wires

3 wires

2 or 4 wires

3 wires

US/JIS PT100 RTD 2 or 4 wires

3 wires

US/JIS PT1000 RTD 2 or 4 wires

3 wires

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active

Wiring check Parameter word (hexa) inactive active

0A20

0B20 inactive active inactive active

0AA0

0BA0

0E20

0F20

0221

0321

0221

0321

02A1

03A1

0621

0721

0EE0

0FE0

0261

0361

02E1

03E1

0661

0761

06E1

07E1

06A1

07A1

0A60

0B60

0AE0

0BE0

0E60

0F60

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Range

DIN Ni 100 RTD

DIN Ni 1000 RTD

Voltage ranges

Range Wiring check

+/-25mV

+/-100mV inactive active active inactive

Cabling

2 or 4 wires

3 wires

2 or 4 wires

3 wires

Temperature

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F

1/10 degrees C

1/10 degrees F inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active inactive active

Wiring check Parameter word (hexa) inactive active

0A23

0B23 inactive active inactive active

0AA3

0BA3

0E23

0F23

0EA3

0FA3

0222

0322

02A2

03A2

0622

0722

06A2

07A2

Parameter word

(hexa)

2210

2310

1211

1311

139

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements on the 170 AAI 520 40 module

Display for the range +/-100 mV

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage is determined by the formula:

Vn = 320 x Va (Va in mV)

Illustration:

Vn

32767

32000

-102.326 mV -100 mV

100 mV

102.326 mV

Va

-32000

-32767

Display for the range +/-25 mV

The digital value transmitted by the base unit, based on the analog input voltage is determined by the formula:

Vn = 1280 x Va (Va in mV)

Illustration:

Vn

32767

32000

-25.599 mV -25 mV

25 mV 25.599 mV

Va

-32000

-32767

Ranges for thermal probes

140

If a Probe or Thermocouple input range is selected, the digital value transmitted is the temperature value directly expressed either in tenths of a degree Celsius or in tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, according to the unit of temperature selected in configuration.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

4.4

170 AAO 120 00 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the 170 AAO 120 00 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the 170 AAO 120 00 module

Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module

Analog Momentums

Page

142

143

145

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

141

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAO 120 00 module

General The base unit 170 AAO 120 00 has 4 analog outputs for controlling actuators in continuous movement, such as variable speed drives, proportional valves or electropneumatic converters.

This module can be configured according to the following ranges: l l

+/-10 V,

0 ... 20 mA.

Configuration of the base unit

The base unit uses: l 4 contiguous input words, to write the output analog values of the processor module to the base unit, l 1 word, to define the parameters of each of the 4 outputs.

Note: The 4 analog outputs must have parameters before the base unit is put into service.

Cycle time The cycle time is independent of the number of registered outputs.

Cycle time = 2 ms

142

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Words of base unit 170 AAO 120 00

Output values

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

The output analog values are written in one word per channel. The base unit 170

AAO 120 00 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit

15 of the word.

The value is left justified.

The representation format is binary, two’s complement.

Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (in +/-10 V).

Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

Illustration:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 1 Always at 0 to

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 4 Always at 0

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

143

Analog Momentums

Parameters These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of a word, to configure the input operation mode. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.

The nibbles are in the following order:

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

The value of each nibble is encoded according to the following rules:

Meaning Nibble value (binary) Value in

Hexa

2#0000

2#00x1

0

1 or 3

2#01x1

2#10x1

5 or 7

9 or B reserved.

Output configured to zero by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to zero (0 V or 0 mA).

Output configured to full scale by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

Output configured to the last displayed value by default.

x has a value of either 0 or 1

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

144

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 120 00 module

Range +/-10 V The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base unit is determined by the formula:

Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.

Illustration:

Va

10 V

-32000

32000

Vn

-10 V

Range 0...20 mA The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula:

1a = 1/1600 x Vn in mA.

Illustration:

Ia

20 mA

0

32000

Vn

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

145

Analog Momentums

4.5

170 AAO 921 00 Module

At a Glance

Aim of this section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the 170 AAO 921 00 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the 170 AAO 921 00 module

170 AAO 921 00 module words

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module

Page

147

148

150

146

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Introducing the 170 AAO 921 00 module

General The base unit 170 AAO 921 00 has 4 analog outputs for controlling actuators in continuous movement, such as variable speed drives, proportional valves or electropneumatic converters.

This module can be configured according to the following ranges: l l

+/-10 V,

4 ... 20 mA.

Configuration of the base unit

The base unit uses: l 4 contiguous words to write the output analog values of the processor module to the base unit, l 1 word, to define the parameters of each of the 4 outputs.

Note: The 4 analog outputs must be assigned parameters before the base unit is put into service.

Cycle time The cycle time is independent of the number of registered outputs.

Cycle time = 2 ms

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

147

Analog Momentums

170 AAO 921 00 module words

Output values

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

The output analog values are written in one word per channel. The base unit 170

AAO 921 00 therefore uses 4 contiguous words. The sign is always assigned to bit

15 of the word.

The value is left justified.

The representation format is binary, two’s complement.

Analog digital conversion is performed on 12 bits + polarity sign (in +/-10 V).

Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. Hence the reading value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

Illustration:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 1 Always at 0 to

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 4 Always at 0

148

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Parameters

Analog Momentums

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module in the form of a word, to configure the input operation mode. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.

The nibbles are in the following order:

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

The value of each nibble is encoded according to the following rules:

Nibble value (binary) Value in

Hexa

2#0000

2#00x1

0

1 or 3

2#01x1

2#10x1

5 or 7

9 or B

Meaning reserved.

Output configured to zero by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to zero (4 V or 0 mA).

Output configured to full scale by default: sends a value to the base unit which makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

Output configured to the last displayed value by default.

x has a value of either 0 or 1

Note: All parameter values other than those indicated in the table above are prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

149

Analog Momentums

Measurement correspondence on the 170 AAO 921 00 module

Range +/-10 V The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base unit is determined by the formula:

Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.

Illustration:

Va

10 V

-32000

32000

Vn

-10 V

Range 4...20 mA The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula: la = 1/20000 x Vn + 4 in mA.

Illustration:

Ia

20 mA

4 mA

32000 Vn

150

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

4.6

170 AMM 090 00 module

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This Section introduces the 170 AMM 090 00 remote module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module

170 AAM 090 00 module words

Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00

Analog Momentums

Page

152

153

156

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

151

Analog Momentums

Introduction to the 170 AAM 090 00 module

General The 170 AAM 090 00 analog base is a mixed module.

It has analog channels and discrete channels: l l l

4 differential inputs,

2 analog outputs,

4 24 VDC discrete inputs, l 2 24 VDC/ 0.5 A discrete outputs.

The discrete inputs are used to directly connect 2-wire proximity sensors. A thermal protection device protects every output from short-circuits and overloads. The outputs remain tripped until the fault disappears.

The analog inputs of this base can be configured with the following ranges: l l l l l l l

+/- 10 V,

+/-5 V,

1-5 V,

+/- 20 mA,

4-20 mA.

The analog outputs can be configured with the following ranges:

+/- 10 V,

4-20 mA.

Configuration of the base l l l

The base uses: l 4 adjacent input words, to send the input analog values from the base to the processor module,

2 adjacent output words, to define the parameters of each of the 16 inputs,

1 word to exchange with the discrete inputs,

1 word to exchange with the discrete outputs.

Note: The 16 analog inputs must be parametered before the base is brought into service.

Conversion time The conversion times are fixed regardless of the number of analog inputs or outputs used.

Time value:

Type

Analog input conversion times

Analog output conversion times

Value

10 ms

1 ms

152

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

170 AAM 090 00 module words

Discrete inputs The 170 AMM 090 00 base sends four discrete input bits (and an error detected message if necessary) to the master in a 16 bit word. The inputs are connected to base connector 2.

Illustration:

%IW\p.2.c\0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Terminal block 1

I4 I3 I2 I1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Discrete outputs The master sends two discrete output bits to the base in a single 16 bit word. The outputs are connected to connector 3.

Illustration:

%QW\p.2.c\0.2

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Terminal block 1

Analog inputs

16

O2

15 14

O1

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

The analog values in input are read or written in one word per channel. The 170 AAM

090 00 base uses 4 adjacent words. The sign is always assigned to bit 15 of the word.

The value is left-justified.

The representation format is binary 2’s complement.

The analog digital conversion is carried out on 12 bits + polarity sign (for bipolar ranges).

Bits 2 … 0 are unused and always at 0. As a result, the read value will be modified in increments of 8 units.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

153

Analog Momentums

Illustration:

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 1 Always at 0 to

%IW\p.2.c\0.0.3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of input 4 Always at 0

Output values

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.0

to

The analog values in outputs are written in one word per channel. The base uses 2 adjacent words.

The format is identical to the analog inputs.

Illustration:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 1 Always at 0

%QW\p.2.c\0.0.1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Sign Value of output 2 Always at 0

Parameters for analog inputs

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of words to configure the operating mode for the inputs. Each nibble of a word corresponds to an analog channel.

The order of the nibbles is as follows:

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1

The value of each nibble is coded according to the following rules:

Nibble value (in binary)

2#0000

2#0010

2#0011

2

3

Value in Hex.

0

Meaning reserved

+/-5 VDC or +/-20 mA

+/-10 VDC

154

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Nibble value (in binary) Value in Hex.

2#0100 4

2#1010 A

Analog Momentums

Meaning

1...5V or 4...20 mA

Parameters for analog outputs

%MW\p.2.c\0.0.4

These parameters are transmitted via the communicator to the module, in the format of a word to configure the operating mode for the outputs. Each nibble of this word corresponds to an analog channel.

The order of the nibbles is as follows:

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved Reserved Channel 2 Channel 1

The value of each nibble is coded according to the following rules:

Meaning Nibble value (in binary)

2#0000

2#00x1

2#01x1

2#10x1

Value in

Hex.

0

1 or 3

5 or 7

9 or B reserved

Output configured by default to zero: sends a value to the base that makes it force the actuators to zero (0

V or 0 mA).

Output configured by default to full scale: sends a value to the base that makes it force the actuators to the full scale value (+10 V or +20 mA).

Output configured by default to the last displayed value x equals 0 or 1 (doesn't matter)

Note: Any parameter value apart from those indicated in the tables above is prohibited. The module continues to function with the last valid parameters it received.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

155

Analog Momentums

Displaying measurements in the module 170 AMM 090 00

Input range +/-

10V

The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:

Vn = 3200 x Va in volts (for the linear zone)

Illustration

Vn

(overshoot error) 32767

32760

32000

<-10.238 V

-10.238 V

-10 V

10 V > 10.238 V

10.238 V

Va

-32000

-32760

-32767 (undershoot

error)

: linear zone

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

Input range

+/- 5V

The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:

Vn = 6400 x Va in volts (for the linear zone).

156

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Analog Momentums

Illustration

Vn

(overshoot error) 32767

32752

32000

<-5.118 V

-5.118 V

-5 V

5 V

5.118 V

> 5.118 V

-32000

-32752

-32767 (undershoot

error))

: linear zone

Va

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

Input range

+/- 20 mA

The current value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:

Vn = 1600 x Ia in mA (for the linear zone).

Illustration

Vn

(overshoot error) 32767

32752

32000

<-20,470 mA

-20,470 mA

-20 mA

20 mA > 20,470 mA

20,470 mA

Ia

-32000

-32752

-32767 (undershoot

error)

: linear zone

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits + sign

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

157

Analog Momentums

Input range 1-5 V The voltage value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:

Vn = 8000 x Va in volts (for the linear zone).

Illustration:

Vn

(overshoot error) 32767

32752

32000

-766

(undershoot error) -768

<0.5 V

1 v

5 V >5.094 V

5.094 V

0.904 V

Va

: linear zone

-32738 (wire break)

Reminder: the resolution is on 12 bits

Input range

4-20 mA

The current value is calculated using the following formula with the help of the digital measurement values:

Vn = 2000 x Ia in mA (for the linear zone).

158

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Illustration:

Analog Momentums

(overshoot error) 32767

32752

32000

Vn

-766

(undershoot error) -768

<2 mA

4 mA

20 mA >20.376 mA

20.376 mA

Ia

<3.617 mA

: linear zone

-32738 (wire break)

Reminder: the resolution is in 12 bits

Note: Inactive channels deliver a value of 0

Output range +/-

10 V

The digital value of the output voltage transmitted by the base is determined by the formula:

Va = 1/3200 x Vn in volts.

Illustration:

Va

10 V

-32000

32000

Vn

-10 V

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

159

Analog Momentums

Output range

0…20 mA

Note: When the bus is restarting, the outputs use the configured parameters. If the module has no valid parameter, the outputs are initialized at 0 V.

The digital value of the output current is determined by the following formula: la = 1/1600 x Vn in mA.

Illustration:

Ia

20 mA

0

32000

Vn

Note: When the bus is restarting, the outputs use the configured parameters. If the module has no valid parameter, the outputs are initialized at 0 V.

160

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Module configuration

5

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter shows how to configure an analog input/output module.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

Topic

Configuring the analog application: General

Parameters for analog input channels

Parameters for analog output channels

Module configurations (illustrations)

Page

162

172

178

182

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

161

Configuration

5.1

Configuring the analog application: General

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the basic operations required to configure the analog application.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module

How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module

How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the

FIPIO bus

Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General

Page

163

165

167

169

170

162

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Description of the configuration screen of a racked TBX analog module

At a Glance

Illustration

The configuration screen of the selected analog module in the rack displays the parameters that are associated to it.

This screen provides access to the display and modification of parameters in offline mode, as well as to Debugging in online mode.

1 TSX AEY 1600 [RACK 0 POSITION 2]

Configuration

Designation: 16E ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Terminal block detection

4

7

8

5

6

9

10

11

12

13

14

Channel

0

3

4

1

2

15

Used

MAST

Task

MAST

MAST

MAST

Symbol Range

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

Scale

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Filter

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

163

Configuration

Description The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.

Address Element

1 Title bar

2

3

4

Function

Gives the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the PLC.

Command zone Is used to display and select the type of parameters: l l operating mode (e.g.:

Debugging

Configuration ),

mode (diagnostics), only accessible when in online mode.

Module zone Gives a short name for the module and supplies supplementary information for certain modules, such as: l l l the input scanning the Cold Junction the output

Cycle ,

compensation made,

Fallback mode .

Channel zone Shows the parameters configured for each of the analog module channels.

164

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module

At a Glance

Illustration

The configuration screen of the selected analog module displays the parameters that are associated with it.

This screen provides access to the display and modification of parameters in offline mode, as well as to Debugging in online mode.

1

2

170 AAI 140 00 [FIPIO2 MODULE 0]

Adjustment

Designation: 16 IN ANA COMMON POINT

3

Channel 0 Task: MAST

4

Default parameters

Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Input 9

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Label

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

Channel inactive

4..20mA

4..20mA

4..20mA

Value

Base

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

165

Configuration

Description

Address Element

1 Title bar

2

3

4

The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.

Command zone

Module zone

Channel zone

Function

Gives the reference of the selected module and its physical position on the FIPIO bus.

Is used to display and select the type of parameters: l l

Configuration

Adjustment

enables modification of the

enables modification of the

Module

Channel

zone,

zone.

Note: Adjustment is not allowed unless the PLC is in RUN mode.

Gives a short name for the module and provides complementary information: l the channel scanning Cycle .

Shows the value configured for each of the analog module channels.

Note: The assignment of a channel in the task is fixed in configuration mode and the type of channel is fixed in adjustment mode.

166

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to access the configuration parameters of a racked analog module

Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration parameters of the channels of a module.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the module hardware configuration screen.

Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module then perform the

Facility

→

Open module command.

Result: The configuration screen of the selected module appears.

TSX AEY 800 [RACK 0 POSITION 10]

Configuration

Designation: 8I ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Terminal block detection

Channel

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Used

MAST

Task

MAST

Symbol Range

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

Scale

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Filter

Some modules have a dialog box that enables the complementary parameters to be accessed.

To access this dialogue box perform one of the following: l right-click on the line of the table corresponding to the channel to be parametered l then select the Properties command in the drop-down menu, double left-click on the line of the table corresponding to the channel to be parametered, l select a cell of the channel to be parametered then confirm with Enter.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

167

Configuration

Example of complementary parametering screen:

TSX AEY 800 [RACK 0 POSITION 10]

Configuration

Designation: 8I ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Terminal block detection

3

4

5

6

7

Channel

0

1

2

Used

MAST

Task

MAST

Symbol Range

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

Channel 7 parameters

Scale

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

Scale

-100% ->

Display

-10000

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

100% ->

Filter

10000

168

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to access the configuration parameters of a remote analog module on the

FIPIO bus

Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration parameters of the channels of a remote analog module on the bus:

2

3

Step

1

Action

Access the module hardware configuration screen.

Double click on the FIPIO zone of the processor.

Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module then perform the

Facility

→

Open module command.

Result: The configuration screen of the selected module appears:

TBX AMS 620 [FIPIO 64 MODULE 0]

Configuration

Designation: 6 IN HL 2 OUT ANA

Channel

0

Task

MAST

1

2

3

4

5

Symbol Range

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

+/- 10 V

Scale

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

%..

0

0

0

0

0

0

Filter

Channel Task

6

7

MAST

Symbol Range Fallback Value

+/- 10 V 0

+/- 10 V 0

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

169

Configuration

Modifying channel parameters of an analog module: General

Introduction

Access the contextual menus.

The configuration editor offers a group of functions which are used to facilitate entry l l l or modification of module parameters such as: the contextual menus, single or multiple selection of channels, copy/paste parameters (using contextual menus).

They can be accessed by right-clicking on the mouse, and are used for fast access to the main commands.

Then the available functions are … If the element to be selected is

… the cell the module zone (outside table)

Copy parameters

Paste parameters

Cancel modifications

Confirm

Animate

Select a channel or a cell

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a channel or the cell of a channel in a module:

Step

1

Action

Left click on the number of the required channel or cell.

Select a group of consecutive channels

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive channels in a module:

Step

1

2

Action

Select the first channel.

Press Shift and click on the last channel.

170

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Select a group of unconsecutive channels

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of unconsecutive channels in a module:

Step

1

2

Action

Select the first channel.

Press Ctrl and click successively on each of the channels.

Select a group of consecutive cells

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive cells in a module:

Step

1

2

Action

Select the first cell.

Drag the mouse downwards or upwards while keeping the mouse button depressed, then release it when the last cell has been reached.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

171

Configuration

5.2

Parameters for analog input channels

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This section shows the different input channel parameters by type of analog module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Input parameters for racked analog modules

Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules

Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

Page

173

176

177

172

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Input parameters for racked analog modules

At a Glance

Parameters

Analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables)

Parameter

Number of input channels

Terminal block detection

Range undershoot monitoring

TSX AEY 1600

16

Channel used Yes / No

Scanning cycle

Range

Normal

Fast

+/-10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

Filtering

Display

0 ..6

% oo

User

MAST / FAST Task associated to the channel

Group of channels affected by the modification of the task

4 consecutive channels

Yes / No

-

TSX AEY 800

8

Yes

Fast

0 ..6

% oo

User

/ No

Normal

+/-10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

Yes / No

Normal

Fast

+/-10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

0 ..6

% oo

User

MAST / FAST MAST / FAST

4 consecutive channels

Yes /

-

No

TSX AEY 810

8

4 consecutive channels

Yes /

Yes

No

/ No

TSX AEY 420

4

Yes / No

-

+/-10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

-

% oo

User

MAST / FAST

2 consecutive channels

Yes / No

Yes / No

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

173

Configuration

174

Parameter

Range overshoot monitoring

Range undershoot limit

Range overshoot limit

Threshold 0

Threshold 1 event processing

-

-

-

TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810

Yes / No

-

-

-

-

-

-

min-12.5% max+12.5%

-

-

-

TSX AEY 420

Yes / No min-12.5% max+12.5%

0

0

Yes / No

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Parameter TSX AEY 414

Number of input channels

4

Channel used -

Scanning cycle -

Range

TSX AEY 1614

16

Yes / No

Normal

Fast

+/-10 V / 0..10 V /0..5 V / 1..5 V

0..20 mA / 4..20 mA

Pt100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / Thermo B

/ Thermo E / Thermo J / Thermo K /

Thermo L / Thermo N / Thermo R /

Thermo S / Thermo T / Thermo U

-13..63 mV

0..400 Ohms / 0..3850 Ohms

Thermo K / Thermo B / Thermo E /

Thermo J / Thermo L / Thermo N /

Thermo R / Thermo S / Thermo T /

Thermo U

-80..+80 mV

0 ..6

0 ..6

Filtering

High level

Display

Display thermowells thermocouples

% oo

User

1/10 °C

1/10 °F

% oo

% oo

User

1/10 °C

1/10 °F

% oo

Task associated to the channel

MAST / FAST MAST / FAST

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Parameter

Group of channels affected by the modification of the task

Terminal block detection

Wiring check

Cold junction compensation

Range undershoot monitoring

Range overshoot monitoring

TSX AEY 414

1 channel

Yes / No

Active /

Internal

-

-

Range undershoot limit

-

Range overshoot limit

-

High precision -

Inactive

/ External

Configuration

TSX AEY 1614

4 consecutive channels

Yes / No

Active / Inactive

Telefast / Pt100 read cold junction

Yes / No

Yes / No min-12.5% max+12.5%

Yes / No

175

Configuration

Input parameters for remote TBX analog modules

At a Glance

Parameters

Remote TBX analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Parameter TBX AES 400

Number of input channels

4

Range

TBX AMS 620

6

+/-10 V

+/-5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

Pt100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000

Thermo B / Thermo E / Thermo J /

Thermo K / Thermo L / Thermo N /

Thermo R / Thermo S / Thermo T

+/-20 mV, +/-50 mV

+/-200 mV, +/-500 mV

0 ..6

+/-10 V

0..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

0 ..6

Filtering

High level

Display

% oo

User

-

% oo

User

Display thermowells thermocouples

1/10°C

1/10 °F

% oo

Task associated to the channel

Sensor check

Rejection

MAST

FAST

Active /

50Hz

Inactive

/ 60Hz

MAST

FAST

-

-

176

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Input parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

At a Glance Remote Momentum analog input modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Note: Most of these parameters can only be accessed in the Adjustment (See

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module, p. 165)

mode of Momentum modules

Parameters

Parameter

Number of input channels

Range

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

170 AAI 030 00 170 AAI 1400 00

8 16

Display thermowells thermocouples

Task associated to all the channels

Wiring test

Cabling

-

-

-

MAST

FAST

170 AAI 520 400

4

170 AMM 090 00

4

+/-10 V

+/-5 V or

+/-20 mA

1..5 V or

4..20 mA

Channel inactive

+/-10 V

+/-5 V

4..20 mA

Channel inactive

-

+/-25 mV

+/-100 mV

EIC Pt100

EIC Pt1000

US/JIS Pt100

US/JIS Pt1000

Ni100 / Ni1000

Thermo B / Thermo E /

Thermo J / Thermo K /

Thermo L / Thermo N /

Thermo R /Thermo S /

Thermo T

+/-10 V

5 V or

4..20mA

1..5 V or

4..20 mA

Channel inactive

1/10 °C

1/10 °F

-

MAST

FAST

-

-

MAST

FAST

Active / Inactive

2 or 4 wires

Only 3 wires for the thermowells

MAST

FAST

-

-

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

177

Configuration

5.3

Parameters for analog output channels

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This section shows the different output channel parameters by type of analog module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Output parameters for racked analog modules

Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules

Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

Page

179

180

181

178

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Output parameters for racked analog modules

At a Glance

Parameters

Racked analog output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Module

Number of output channels

Range

TSX ASY 410

4

TSX ASY 800

8

+/-10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

+/-10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

High level Display

% oo

(non modifiable) % oo

(non modifiable)

Task associated to the channel

Terminal block detection Yes / No No

Fallback Fallback to 0

Maintain

Fallback to a value

Fallback to 0

Maintain

Fallback to a value

24V supply check

Supply

Range undershoot monitoring

Range overshoot monitoring

/

/

MAST

Yes / No

Yes

/ FAST

/ No

MAST

Yes /

/ FAST

Internal /

Yes

Yes

No

/ No

/ No

External

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

179

Configuration

Output parameters for remote TBX analog modules

At a Glance

Parameters

Remote analog output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Module

Number of output channels

Range

TBX AMS 620

2

+/-10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

Display

% oo

Task associated with the channel

Fallback

MAST / FAST

Fallback to 0

Maintain

Fallback to a value

TBX ASS 200

2

+/-10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

% oo

MAST / FAST

Fallback to 0

Maintain

Fallback to a value

180

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Output parameters for remote Momentum analog modules

At a Glance Remote analog Momentum output modules have parameters for each channel displayed in the module configuration screen.

Note: Most of these parameters can only be accessed in the Adjustment (See

Description of the configuration screen of a Momentum analog module, p. 165)

mode of Momentum modules

Parameters Parameters for each of the modules (the default parameters are in bold in the tables).

Module

Number of output channels

Range

170 AAO 120 00

4

170 AAO 921 00

4

170 AMM 090 00

2

+/-10 V

0..20mA

MAST / FAST

+/-10 V

4..20mA

MAST / FAST

+/-10 V

0..20mA

MAST / FAST Task associated with all the channels

Fallback Maintain

Fallback to 0

Full scale fallback

Maintain

Fallback to 0

Full scale fallback

Maintain

Fallback to 0

Full scale fallback

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

181

Configuration

5.4

Module configurations (illustrations)

At a Glance

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces most of the procedures for modifying configuration parameters at analog input/output module level.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module

Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel

Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current

Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel

Modifying the filter value of analog module channels

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module

Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules

Page

183

184

185

187

189

190

191

Modifying Input channels used

Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection

Cold junction compensation

High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module

Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs

Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules

192

193

194

195

196

197

182

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying the range of an input or output of an analog module

At a Glance

Procedure

This parameter defines the range of the input or output channel. l l l l

According to the type of module, the input or output range can be: in electrical voltage, in electrical current, thermocouple, thermowell.

The table below shows the procedure for defining the range assigned to the channels of an analog module.

Step

1

2

3

4

Procedure

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

To access the required input channel, click on the browse button in the drop-down menu which is in the Range column of the input channels zone.

Result : a drop-down list appears.

Range

+/-10V

+/-10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

Select the required range.

Confirm the reconfiguration if necessary.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

183

Configuration

Modifying the task associated to an analog module channel

At a Glance This parameter defines the task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated.

The task is defined: l l for all the channels of an FIPIO connection point, for a group of 2 or 4 consecutive channels.

Possible options are: l the task MAST , l the task FAST .

Note : It is vital that no more than 2 analog modules, each having 4 channels used, are assigned to the FAST task. If more than 2 are assigned, there is a risk of system problems.

Note: The FAST task is only assigned to input channels in a fast scanning cycle.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of an analog module.

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

To access the group of input channels, click on browse button of the drop-down menu situated in the Task column of the input channels zone.

Result : a drop-down list appears:

Task

MAST

MAST

FAST

Select the required task.

Confirm the reconfiguration if necessary.

184

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying the display format of an input channel as voltage or as current

At a Glance This parameter defines the display format of a measurement for an analog module l l channel whose range is configured as voltage or as current.

The display format can be: standardized 0..10000 or +10000 ( user ( User ),

% ),

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

185

Configuration

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the display scale assigned to an analog module channel.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

For the required channel, double click on the corresponding box in the Scale column of the input channels zone.

Result : The Channel parameters dialog box appears:

Channel 0 parameters

Scale

-100%->

100%->

Display

-10000

10000

Under/overshoots

Under: -11250

Checked.

Over: 11250

Checked

Event

Event

Threshold 0:

Threshold 1:

0

0

0

4

5

6

Type in the values to be assigned to the channel in the two Display boxes situated in the Scale zone.

Confirm the selection by closing the dialog box

If the default values have been selected (standardized display), the corresponding cell in the Scale zone shows %..

Otherwise, it shows User

(user-defined display)

186

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying display format of a thermocouple or thermowell channel

At a Glance This parameter defines the display format of the measurement of an analog module channel whose range is configured in thermocouples or thermowells.

The display format can be for display in degrees Celsius or in degrees Fahrenheit , with signaling of short circuit or open circuit if necessary.

The display format can be: l standardized, which is the default scale of the selected thermocouple of l user-defined ( User ).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

187

Configuration

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the display scale assigned to an analog module channel.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

For the required channel, double click on the corresponding box in the Scale column of the input channels zone.

Result : The Channel parameters dialog box appears:

Channel 0 parameters

Broken wire test

Temperature range: from -2700 to 13720 1/10°C

Scale

Normalized

Display

Unit

°C

°F

-2700

13720

1/10°C

1/10°C

Under/overshoots

Under: -2700 Checked

Over: 13720 Checked

4

5

6

Select or deselect the Broken wire test .

Check the Standardized box for a standardized display, or modify at least one of the limits: the display zone of the channel parameters shows %..

whichever unit of temperature has been selected.

188

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying the filter value of analog module channels

At a Glance This parameter defines the type of filtering of the selected input channel for analog modules.

The available filter values are: l l l 0 : no filtering, l 1 and 2 : low filtering,

3 and 4 : medium filtering,

5 and 6 : high filtering.

Note: If the fast scanning cycle is selected, filtering is not recognized.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the filter value assigned to the inputs of analog modules.

Step

1

2

3

3

4

5

1

2

0

0

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

For the required input channel, click on the arrow of the drop-down menu in the

Filter column.

Result : The drop-down menu appears:

Filter

4

5

Select the filter value to be assigned to the selected channel.

The efficiency value (alpha coefficient) of the selected filter and the associated response time are then displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

189

Configuration

Modifying the Scanning cycle of the inputs of a racked analog module

At a Glance This parameter defines the scanning cycle of the inputs of racked analog modules. l l

The input scanning cycle can be: l normal : the channels are sampled according to the time specified in the module characteristics, l fast : only the registered and Used inputs are sampled. The cycle time depends on the number of channels used and on the scanning time of a channel.

Input registers are updated: for the for the

Normal

Fast

cycle, at the start of the assigned ( MAST or FAST ).

MAST task cycle,

cycle, at the start of the cycle of the task to which the module is

Note: The Normal / Fast cycle and channels Used parameters cannot be modified in online mode, if the application has been transferred to the PLC with the default values of these parameters (normal cycle and all channels used).

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the scanning cycle assigned to the inputs of an analog module.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

For the groups of input channels, click on the checkbox Normal / Fast situated in the Cycle field of the module zone.

Result : the selected scanning cycle will then be assigned to the channels.

TSX AEY 800 [RACK 0 POSITION 9]

Configuration

Designation: 8E ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Terminal block detection

Channel

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

Used Task

MAST

MAST

Symbol Range not used

+/-10V

+/-10V

+/-10V not used not used

+/-10V not used

Scale

%...

%...

%...

%...

%...

%...

%...

%...

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Filter

190

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying terminal block presence detection in TSX and TBX analog modules

At a Glance This function detects the presence of the SubD connector(s) or of the terminal block and signals a fault when the latter is absent.

Note: for modules equipped with two SubD connectors, the terminal block fault is signaled if at least one channel is used on the absent connector.

Designation: 8I ANA. HIGH LEVEL

Cycle

Normal

Fast Terminal block detection

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for selecting terminal block detection.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Terminal block detection checkbox.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

191

Configuration

Modifying Input channels used

At a Glance

Procedure

A channel is declared in a task when the measured values are ‘returned’ to the task assigned to the channel.

When a channel is unused the line is grayed out, the value 0 is returned to the application program and the faults on this channel (range overshoot, etc.) are inactive.

The table below shows the procedure for modifying the use of a channel:

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the module hardware configuration screen.

Select the required channel.

Click on the Used checkbox of the channel to be parameterized to select or deselect the channel:

1

2

3

0

Ch.

Used

192

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying overshoot monitoring and event processing selection

At a Glance Overshoot monitoring is defined by a monitored or unmonitored lower limit and by a monitored or unmonitored upper limit.

Event processing is defined by the event number that is activated on crossing one of the thresholds indicated.

Note: Event processing is only possible if the PL7 application includes an event

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for adjusting these parameters:

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Double click on the channel to be modified.

Result : The Channel parameters dialog box appears.

Channel 0 parameters

Scale

-100%->

100%->

Display

-10000

10000

Under/overshoots

Under: -11250

Checked.

Over: 11250

Checked

Event

Event

Threshold 0:

Threshold 1:

0

0

0

3

4

5

Check or uncheck the box Monitored undershoot to indicate an undershoot limit.

Check or uncheck the box Monitored overshoot to indicate an undershoot limit.

Check or uncheck the box Event to characterize an event trigger. The event processing selected in this screen is activated on crossing one of the thresholds indicated in Threshold 0 and Threshold 1 .

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

193

Configuration

Cold junction compensation

At a Glance This function is available on input modules TSX and TBX. It can be internal or external. By default, internal compensation is offered.

Note: If external compensation is selected, channel 0 of the module is forced, after confirmation, in range Pt100

For the

TSX AEY 414 module

The table below gives the procedure for modifying cold junction compensation.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Internal or External checkbox in the Cold Junction box.

For the

TSX AEY 1614 module

The table below gives the procedure for modifying cold junction compensation.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Internal Telefast or External Pt100 button.

These two command buttons are used to select the type of cold junction compensation: l Internal Telefast (default). Compensation is made at the level of the Telefast terminal block; in this case it is possible to ‘return’ the cold junction temperature value via channel 8, by checking the box Read Cold Junction after confirming l the warning message,

External, via a PT100 probe to be connected to channels 0 and 8. Channel 0 supplies current to the probe and channel 8 measures the temperature.

194

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

High precision mode for TSX AEY 1614 module

At a Glance This mode offers greater precision on temperature measurements using a selfcalibration procedure.

Note: this self-calibration procedure adds a period of 70 ms to each cycle (See

Timing of measurements, p. 46).

Procedure The table below gives the procedure for selecting the high precision mode.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the High Precision checkbox.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

195

Configuration

Modifying the fallback mode of analog outputs

At a Glance

Procedure

This parameter defines the fallback mode that is assumed by the outputs when the

PLC switches to STOP mode or when there is a communication fault.

Possible modes are: l Fallback : the outputs are set to a value between -10000 et 10000 (0 by default) l which can be parameterized,

Maintain the value : the outputs remain in the state in which they were before the switch into STOP mode.

The table below gives the procedure for defining the fallback mode assigned to the outputs of analog modules.

Step

1

Action

To modify the fallback value, leave the Fallback box checked and type the required value in the Value box.

Result : The selected fallback mode will then be assigned to the module outputs.

Fallback Value

706

1964

2 For maintenance, click in the Fallback check box.

Result : The maintenance of the value will then be assigned to the module outputs.

Fallback Value

196

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Modifying parameters common to TBX or TSX output modules

At a Glance TBX or TSX analog output modules have parameters which apply to the whole module.

These parameters define l l the type of supply for the module, the module supply monitoring, l the terminal block detection.

This information is all displayed in the module zone

Designation: 8O ANA. HL NON INS.

Supply

Internal

24V output supply monitoring

External Terminal block detection

Supply to outputs

This is carried out using 2 buttons: l l internal external

: the 24V supply internal to the module feeds the outputs channels,

: a 24V supply external to the module feeds the outputs channels

Note: Do not supply more than two TSX ASY 800 modules with the power supply from the same rack.

Supply fault

Terminal block detection

When the 24V output supply fault monitoring box is checked, the module monitors the presence of the internal or external 24V supply.

When the Terminal block detection box is checked, the module monitors the presence of the terminal block, and indicates a fault if this is missing.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

197

Configuration

198

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The Debugging function

6

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter looks at the debugging function and commands in analog input/output modules.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module

Description of an analog module debugging screen

Analog module diagnostics

Forcing/unforcing analog channels

Detailed analog channel diagnostics

Modifying the channel filtering value

Aligning an input channel

Modifying the fallback value of an output

Calibration function for an analog module

Page

200

201

203

204

206

208

210

211

213

199

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Introducing the Debugging Function of an analog module

Introduction

Procedure

This function is only accessible in online mode. Debugging is used for each input/ output module of the application: l to display the parameters of each of its channels (channel state, filtering value, etc.), l to access the diagnostics and adjusting function for the selected channel (forcing the channel, masking the channel, etc.).

The function also gives access to the module diagnostics in the case of a fault.

The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Debugging function:

Step

1

2

Action

Switch to on-line mode.

Double-click on the module in hardware configuration.

Result : The module Debugging screen then appears.

200

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Description of an analog module debugging screen

At a Glance

Illustration

2

1

3

4

5

The debugging screen displays the value and status for each channel in the selected module in real-time. It also enables the user to access the channel command

(forcing the input or output value, reactivation of outputs, etc.).

The debugging screen is composed as follows:

TSX AEY 420 [RACK 0 POSITION 6]

Debugging

Designation: 4E ANA. RAPIDES HN. Version: 1.0

Channel

2

3

0

1

Symbol F

Global unforcing

ERR

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

<

0

-4

-2

-3

Value

RUN ERR IO DIAG...

Adjusting Channel 2

>

0

0

0

0

A

Display

Range +/-10V

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

0

Event

Event

Threshold 0:

0

Threshold 1:

0

Alignment

Target value

0

Confirm

0

Force

Unforce

Confirm

Offset

0

Reset

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

201

Debugging

Description The table below presents the different elements of the debugging screen and their functions.

Address Element

1

2

3

4

5

Title bar

Drop-down menu

Function

Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical location as well as the rack number for the rack-mounted modules or the FIPIO connection point for the remote input/ outputs.

Enables selection: l of the debug phase: l l

Configuration,

Debugging (diagnostics), only possible when in online mode, l l Calibration (for input modules).

of channels by type (input or output), when the specified module contains both inputs and outputs.

Module zone Displays the name of the selected module as well as a copy of the module status LEDs

(Run, Err, I/O).

Provides direct access: l to module diagnostics when the module has an error (indicated by the LED integrated in the diagnostics access button switching to red), l to the Global unforcing function for channels.

Note: Displaying this zone is optional. The selection is made using the View

→

Module zone command.

Channel zones

Command zone

Displays the value and status for each channel in the module in real-time. The symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when the user has defined this

(from the variables editor).

Provides direct access: l to channel-by-channel diagnostics when channels have an error (indicated by the LED integrated in the diagnostics access button switching to red), l to the output reactivation command.

Gives access to the commands of a channel.

202

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Analog module diagnostics

At a Glance

Procedure

The Module diagnostics function displays errors when they occur, classified l l l according to category: internal errors (module breakdown, running self-test), external errors (terminal block fault), other errors (configuration error, module missing or switched off, faulty channel(s)

(details in channel diagnostics)).

A module error is indicated by a number of LEDs changing to red, such as: l l l l in the rack-level configuration editor: l the module position LED, in the module-level configuration editor: the Err and I/O LEDs, depending on the type of error, the Diag LED.

The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Module diagnostics screen.

Step

1

2

Action

Open the module debugging screen.

Click on the Diag button in the module zone.

Result: The list of module errors appears.

Module diagnostics

Internal faults External faults Other faults

Terminal block

OK

Note: It is not possible to access the module diagnostics screen if a configuration error, major breakdown error or module missing error occurs.

The following message appears on the screen: " The module is missing or different from that configured for this position ."

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

203

Debugging

Forcing/unforcing analog channels

At a Glance

Procedure

This function is used to modify the state of all or some of the channels of a module.

The state of a forced output is fixed and cannot be modified by the application until after unforcing.

Note: However, in the case of a fault involving an output fallback, the state of the outputs takes the value defined on configuration of the Fallback mode parameter.

The various commands available are: l for one or several channels: l forcing to the indicated value, l l unforcing (when the selected channel(s) are forced, for all the channels of a module (when at least one channel is forced: l global channel unforcing.

The table below shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or some of the channels of a module:

2

3

Step

1

4

Action for a channel

Open the module debugging screen.

Double-click in the cell in the Value column of the required channel (1).

Enter the required value in the Forcing box.

Click on the Force button.

Result : an F appears in the column F

Adjusting Channel 2

Display

Range +/-10V

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

0

Force

Unforce

Event

Event

0

0

Confirm

204

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Step Action for a channel

(1) The Channel adjustment screen can also be accessed by right-clicking on the required channel then left-clicking on the Properties button.

It is possible to disable forcing of all the channels of a module with the command button Global unforcing in the Debugging screen.

TSX AEY 420 [RACK 0 POSITION 6]

Debugging

Designation : 4 FAST HN. ANALOG INPUT Version : 1.0

Global Unforcing RUN ERR IO DIAG...

Rules to be respected

It is only possible to force an output when the task associated with this output is in

RUN mode. If the task is in STOP mode, forcing is accepted but not applied; the output is in Fallback/Maintain mode.

If an output is in forced state, it switches to Fallback/Maintain mode when the associated task switches to STOP mode. When this task returns to RUN mode, the output takes the forced value again.

A forced channel cannot be reconfigured in online mode.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

205

Debugging

Detailed analog channel diagnostics

At a Glance The Channel diagnostics function displays errors when they occur, classified according to category: l internal faults: l Module failure l external faults: l sensor link fault l l terminal block fault range overshoot or undershoot fault l l calibration fault cold junction compensation fault l other faults: l terminal block fault l l configuration fault communication error l l application error

24V power supply fault l value outside limits l channel not ready

A faulty channel is indicated by the Diag LED in the Err column in the configuration editor switching to red.

206

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Procedure

Debugging

The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Channel diagnostics screen.

Step

1

2

Action

Open the module debugging screen.

For the faulty channel, click on the Diag button in the Err column.

2

3

0

1

Ch.

Symbole F ERR

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

<

0

-4

-2

-3

Value >

0

0

0

0

A

Result: The list of channel errors appears.

Channel diagnostics

Internal faults External faults Other faults

Terminal block

Forced channel

OK

Note: The channel diagnostics information can also be accessed by program

(refer to the Shared task functions manual: READ_STS instruction).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

207

Debugging

Modifying the channel filtering value

At a Glance This function is used to modify the filtering value of one or several channels of an l l l l analog module.

The available commands are:

0 : no filtering,

1

3

5

and

and

and

2

4

6

: low filtering,

: medium filtering,

: high filtering.

208

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Procedure

Step

1

2

3

The table below gives the procedure for changing a filtering value.

Action for a channel

Access the debug screen.

Select the channel to be modified in the channel zone and double-click in the corresponding box in the

Filter box.

Click on the little arrow in the box in the Filtering field of the Channel adjustment dialog box, and define the new selected filtering value in the drop-down menu.

Result : The Channel adjustment dialog box appears.

TSX AEY 1600 [RACK 0 POSITION 9]

Debugging

Designation: 16E ANA. HIGH LEVEL Version: 0.4

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

0

Channel Symbol F

Global unforcing RUN

ERR

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

Value

-252

-193

-188

-177

-166

-177

-177

-177

-257

-198

-182

-177

-171

-171

-166

-182

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Filter

ERR

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

A

IO

Adjusting Channel 7

DIAG...

Display

Range +/-10V

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

0

Force

Unforce

Filtering

1

4

Alignment

6

0

Confirm

Confirm

Offset

0

Reset

4

5

Confirm the choice by closing the Channel adjustment dialog box.

The new filtering value then appears in the box corresponding to the selected channel in the Filter column of the channel zone.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

209

Debugging

Aligning an input channel

At a Glance

Procedure

The procedure for aligning an input is used to add an offset value to the value measured by this input, in order to compensate for a sensor shift (e.g. to adjust to 0

°C the measurement of a Pt100 probe immersed in a bucket of ice for adjustment).

The table below shows the procedure for aligning an input channel:

Step Action for a channel

1 Access the debug screen.

2 Select the channel to be aligned in the channel zone and double-click on the corresponding box in column A .

3 Click on the box in the Target value field in the Alignment dialog box and enter the new alignment value.

4 Confirm this new alignment value by clicking on the OK button.

Result : The new offset value is applied and appears in column A .

Channel 3 adjustments

Display

Range +/- 10V

-10000 to 10000

Forcing

0 Force

Unforce

Filtering

0 Confirm

Align

Target value

1964

Confirm

Offset

0

Reset

5 Close the Channel adjustment dialog box.

Notes

Note: When the alignment offset is modified by program with the WRITE_PARAM instruction (see

Shared task functions manual), its value must be between +1500 and –1500.

Note: The calculated offset value does not take into account the "keyboard" commands given by the user. Running the program (RUN), which also controls the alignment, simultaneously, renders the offset invalid.

210

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Modifying the fallback value of an output

At a Glance

Procedure

When an output is configured in Fallback mode, the corresponding button is valid but the Fallback/Maintain information is grayed out, because the fallback mode cannot be modified in Debugging mode. However, it is possible to change the fallback value by entering a new value.

The table below summarizes the procedure for modifying the fallback value:

Step

1

2

3

Action for a channel

Access the debug screen.

Select the channel in the channel zone and double-click in the corresponding box in the Fallback column.

Click on the box in the Value field in the Fallback dialog box and enter the new fallback value.

The value must be: l For TSX ASY 800 and ASY 410 software version modules < 1.0, l between -10000 and 10000 in range 10 V, l l between 0 and 10000 in ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA,

For TSX ASY 800 and ASY 410 software version modules > 1.0, l l between -10500 and 10500 in range 10 V, between 0 and 10500 in ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

211

Debugging

Notes

Step

4

Action for a channel

Confirm this new value by clicking on the OK button.

Result : The new fallback value is applied and appears.

TSX AEY 410 [RACK 0 POSITION 4]

Debugging

Designation: 16I ANA. HIGH LEVEL Version: 0.4

Channel

0

1

2

3

Symbol

Global unforcing

F ERR

DIAG.

DIAG.

DIAG.

DIAG.

0

0

0

0

Value

RUN ERR

0

0

0

0

Fallback

IO DIAG ...

Display

Range +/-10V

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

0 Force

Unforce

Fallback

Fallback Maintain

Value:

0 Confirm

5 Close the Channel adjustment dialog box.

Note: The fallback value can also be modified by program, with the

WRITE_PARAM instruction (see Shared task functions manual).

Note: The fallback value cannot be modified on TBX modules.

212

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Calibration function for an analog module

Introduction This function is only accessible in online mode. It is used to recalibrate the channels of each analog input module of an application.

Calibration is used to correct the long-term module drift. It can also be used to optimize the precision of the measurement at ambient temperatures other than 25 degrees C.

Procedure Procedure for accessing the Calibration function:

Step Action

1 Double-click on the module in hardware configuration.

Result : The Debugging screen appears.

2 In the drop-down menu at the top left, select the Calibration function to make the Calibration screen appear.

TSX AEY 1600 [RACK 0 POSITION 9]

Calibration

Configuration

Debugging

Calibration

HIGH LEVEL

RUN ERR IO DIAG...

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

213

Debugging

Introduction to the calibration screen

This screen displays the state of each of its channels in real-time and enables their calibration to be accessed.

Screen view:

1

2 Calibration

Designation: 16I ANA. HIGH LEVEL

3

RUN ERR IO DIAG ...

4

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

Channel Symbol F ERR

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

DIAG..

Value

-258

-198

-188

694

-177

-177

-182

-182

-263

-204

-188

-182

-177

-177

-172

-188

Different functions of the calibration screen

3

4

Address Function

1 This panel gives the module catalogue reference and slot in the PLC (rack and position).

2 This command zone displays the function in progress (Calibration function) and is used to select the Configuration or Debugging function from a dropdown list box. By activating the Calibration checkbox, the calibration of the channels (TSX AEY 800 / 810 / 1600, TBX AES 400, TBX AMS 620) or of the selected channel (TSX AEY 414) can be accessed.

This zone at "module" level contains the module name and version.

This zone at "channel" level displays the ERR information for each channel: all the measurements are invalid; filtering and alignment are inhibited.

214

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Use

List

Debugging

For TSX AEY 800 / 810 / 1600, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620 modules, only channel 0 needs to be calibrated for all the module channels to be calibrated.

For the TSX AEY 1614 module, only channels 0 and 8 need to be calibrated for all the module channels to be calibrated.

For the TSX AEY 414 module, general channel calibration must be performed.

The different calibration procedures are described in each section referring to input l l l l l modules: l TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 (See Calibration of the TSX AEY 800 and TSX

AEY 1600 modules, p. 31)

TSX AEY 810 (See

Calibrating the TSX AEY 810 module, p. 42)

TSX AEY 1614 (See

TSX AEY 414 (See

TBX AES 400 (See

TBX AMS 620 (See

Calibrating the TSX AEY 1614 module, p. 53)

Calibration, p. 67)

Calibrating the TBX AES 400 module, p. 101)

Calibrating the TBX AMS 600 module, p. 115)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

215

Debugging

216

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Associated bits and words

7

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter looks at the addressing of objects associated to analog inputs/outputs.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

7.1

7.2

7.3

Topic

Addressing of analog module objects

Implicit exchange objects

Explicit exchange objects

Page

218

223

225

217

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

7.1

Addressing of analog module objects

At a Glance

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the principle of addressing for analog module objects.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Addressing objects of analog rack module

Addressing objects of remote analog modules

Page

219

221

218

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

Addressing objects of analog rack module

At a Glance

Illustration

The addressing of the main bit and word objects of input/output modules is done on l l l a geographical basis. It depends on: the number (address) of the rack, the physical position of the module in the rack, the module channel number.

Addressing is defined in the following way:

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F

Symbol Object type Format

X

Rack

Y

Position i r

Channel no. Position

Syntax The table below describes the different addressing parameters.

Family

Symbol

Object type

Element Values Description

% -

I

Q

M

-

-

-

Image of the physical input of the module.

Image of the physical output of the module.

This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

Internal variable.

This reading or writing information is exchanged at the request of the application.

Format (size)

K

X

-

-

Internal constant.

This configuration information is available as read only.

Boolean.

For Boolean objects this element can be omitted.

Single length.

Double length.

W

D

16 bits

32 bits

Rack address

Module position

F x y

32 bits

0 or 1

0 to 7

00 to 14

(1)

Floating. The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard

(equivalent to IEC 559).

TSX 5710/102/103/153, PMX 57102, PCX 571012.

Other processors.

Position number in the rack.

When the rack number (x) is different from 0, the position (y) is encoded with 2 digits: 00 to 14; on the other hand, if the rack number (x) is 0, you remove the insignificant zeros (elimination from the left) from "y" ("x" does not appear and "y" is 1 digit for values less than 9).

(1) : the maximum number of slots means that 2 racks must be used for the same address.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

219

Bits and words

Family

Channel no.

i

Element Values

0 to 127 or MOD

Description

MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and parameters common to all the channels.

Rank r 0 to 127 or ERR

Position of the bit in the word.

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

(1) : the maximum number of slots means that 2 racks must be used for the same address.

Examples

Object

%IW102.5

%QW204.3

%I102.MOD.ERR

%I204.3.ERR

The table below shows some examples of addressing analog objects.

Description word picture of analog input 5 of the module placed in position 2 in rack address 1.

%QW204.3 designates the word picture of analog input 3 of the module placed in position 4 in rack 2.

Information on analogue input module fault in position 2 of rack 1.

Information on a fault on channel 3 of the analogue output module in position 4 of rack 2.

Illustration

220

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

Addressing objects of remote analog modules

At a Glance

Illustration

The addressing of the main bit and word objects of remote modules on the FIPIO l l l bus is on a geographical basis. It depends on: the connection point, the type of module (standard or extended), the channel number.

Addressing is defined in the following way:

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F

Symbol Object type Format

\ p.2.c

\ m

Address module/channel and no.

connection point

Module i r

Channel no.Position

Syntax The table below describes the different elements that make up addressing.

Family

Symbol

Object type

Format (size)

Module/channel address and connection point p

2 c

Module position m

Channel no.

i

W

D

F

Element Values Meaning

% -

I

Q

M

-

-

-

Image of the physical input of the module,

Image of the physical output of the module,

This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

Internal variable,

This reading or writing information is exchanged at the request of the application.

K

X

-

-

Internal constant,

This configuration information is available as read only.

Boolean,

For Boolean objects the X can be omitted.

16 bits

32 bits

32 bits

Single length.

Double length.

Floating. The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard

(equivalent to IEC 559).

0 or 1

-

Position number of the processor in the rack.

Channel number of the built-in FIPIO link in the processor.

1 to 127 Connection point number.

0 or 1 0 : standard module, 1: extension module.

0 to 127 or MOD

MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and parameters common to all the channels.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

221

Bits and words

Family

Rank

Element Values Meaning r 0 to 255 or ERR

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

Examples The table below shows some examples of addressing objects of remote analog modules.

Object

%IW\0.2.6\0.5

Meaning word image of analog input 5 of the standard remote input module at connection point 6 of the FIPIO bus.

%QW\0.2.8\1.7

0 word image of analog output 7 of the extended remote output module at connection point 8 of the FIPIO bus.

TSX 57352 FIPIO manager

1 TBX LEP 030 0 TBX AES 400

2

3

TBX LEP 030 0 TBX ASM 620

170 FNT 110 01 0 170 ADI 350 00

4 TBX LEP 030 0 TBX AES 400 1 TBX ASS 200

222

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

7.2

Implicit exchange objects

Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog function

At a Glance

Channel values

These are objects used for programming and performing diagnostics of analog modules These objects are exchanged automatically on each task cycle in which the module channels are configured.

Values of analog channels, applicable to all modules.

Address

%[email protected]

%[email protected]

Function

Value of input channel in analog input module.

Value of output channel in analog output module.

Example: Word %IW105.3 always contains the present value on input 3 of the module in position 5 in address 1 rack.

Error bit objects Error bit objects, applicable to all modules.

Address (1)

%[email protected]

R

Meaning

When it is on 1, this indicates that the i input channel of the module at the @module address is faulty.

%[email protected]

When it is on 1, this indicates that the module at the @module address is faulty.

Key: @module = module address: l l xy for racked modules,

\p2c\m for remote modules.

Measurement status word

Address

%IWxy.i.1

Modules involved

TSX AEY420 / 810 / 1614

Meaning of bits for %IWxy.i.1measurement status word

Address

%IWxy.i.1:X0

%IWxy.i.1:X1

%IWxy.i.1:X2

Meaning

Aligned channel

Forced channel

Recalibration mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

223

Bits and words

Address

%IWxy.i.1:X3

%IWxy.i.1:X4

%IWxy.i.1:X5

%IWxy.i.1:X6

%IWxy.i.1:X7

%IWxy.i.1:X8 to 15

Meaning

Recalibration command in progress

Recalibrated channel

Measurement in the lower tolerance zone

Measurement in the upper tolerance zone

Loss of event (only in TSX AEY 420)

Reserved

Event source status word

Address

%IWxy.i.2

Module involved

TSX AEY 420

Meaning of bits for %IWxy.i.2 event source status word (1 = no event, 1 = event)

Address

%IWxy.i.2:X0

%IWxy.i.2:X1

%IWxy.i.2:X2

%IWxy.i.2:X3

%IWxy.i.2:X4 to 15

Meaning

Rising threshold 0 crossing

Descending threshold 0 crossing

Rising threshold 1 crossing

Descending threshold 1 crossing

Reserved

Enable event command word

Address

%QWxy.i.1

Module involved

TSX AEY 420

Meaning of bits for %QWxy.i.1 enable event command word (0 = masking, 1 = enable)

Address

%QWxy.i.1:X0

%QWxy.i.1:X1

%QWxy.i.1:X2

%QWxy.i.1:X3

%QWxy.i.1:X4 to 15

Meaning

Rising threshold 0 crossing

Descending threshold 0 crossing

Rising threshold 1 crossing

Descending threshold 1 crossing

Reserved

224

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

7.3

Explicit exchange objects

At a Glance

What's in this section

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces explicit exchange objects for analog modules.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Explicit exchange objects: General

Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs

Details on analog function explicit exchange words

Page

226

227

230

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

225

Bits and words

Explicit exchange objects: General

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects give information (e.g.: terminal block fault, module missing, etc.) and additional commands for performing advanced programming of the task functions.

Note: Configuration constants %[email protected] (@module = module address), not explained in this manual can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged on request from the program user using the following instructions: l l l l l l

READ_STS (read status words),

WRITE_CMD (write command words),

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

(write adjustment parameters),

(read adjustment parameters),

(save adjustment parameters),

RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).

Note: All these instructions are detailed in the manual: Shared Task Functions

226

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

Explicit exchange objects associated with outputs

Racked output modules

Table of words available according to the different racked modules:

Address Meaning TSX AEY

800

Yes %MWxy.MOD.2

Module status word

%MWxy.i

%MWxy.i.1

%MWxy.i.2

Exchange in progress

Exchange report

Channel status word

%MWxy.i.3

%MWxy.i.4

Yes

Yes

Yes

Command

(recalibration/ forcing)

No

Command (forcing value)

No

%MWxy.i.5

%MWxy.i.6

%MWxy.i.7

%MWxy.i.8

%MWxy.i.9

Command (range to be recalibrated)

Command (current source to be recalibrated)

No

No

Command word containing the channel filtering co-efficient

Command word containing the channel alignment offset

Yes

Yes

Command word containing the value of threshold

0 assigned to the channel

No

TSX AEY

810

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

TSX AEY

1600

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

TSX AEY

420

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

TSX AEY

414

Yes

TSX AEY

1614

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

227

Bits and words

Address

%MWxy.i.10

Meaning

Command word containing the value of threshold

1 assigned to the channel

TSX AEY

800

No

TSX AEY

810

No

TSX AEY

1600

No

TSX AEY

420

Yes

TSX AEY

414

No

TSX AEY

1614

No

Remote modules Table of words available according to the different remote modules:

Address Meaning

%MW\p.2.c\m.MOD.2

Module state

%MW\p.2.c\m.i

Exchange in progress

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.1

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.2

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.3

Exchange report

Channel state

Command

(recalibration/ forcing)

TBX

ASS

200

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

TBX

AES

400

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

TBX

AMS

620

Yes

Yes (*) Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

170 AAI

14000

170 AAI

52040

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

170

AAO

12000

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

170

AAO

92100

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.4

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.5

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.6

Command (forcing value)

Yes

Command (range to be recalibrated)

No

Command (current source to be recalibrated)

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes (*)

Yes (*)

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.7

%MW\p.2.c\m.i.8

Adjust (filtering coefficient)

Adjust (alignment offset)

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

(*) These words only exist for channel 0 and channel 4 of the modules TBX AMS 620. Information contained in these words concerns the 2 or 4 successive module channels.

The command words above can be modified by program:

Example:

Filtering co-efficient for channel 3 of module TSX AEY 1600 modified by giving it the value 2.

The module is in position 3 of rack 0.

The sequence is as follows:

228

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Racked output modules

Bits and words

! %MW9.3.7:=2; ! WRITE_CMD %CH9.3;

For more information on programming explicit objects, refer to the manual: Common

Tasks.

Table of words available according to the different racked modules:

Address

%MWxy.MOD

%MWxy.MOD.1

%MWxy.MOD.2

%MWxy.MOD.3

%MWxy.i

%MWxy.i.1

%MWxy.i.2

%MWxy.i.3

%MWxy.i.4

%MWxy.i.5

Meaning

Reserved

Reserved

Module state

Reserved

TSX ASY

410

Yes

Yes

Exchange in progress

Exchange report

Channel state

Reserved

Yes

Yes

Command word containing the channel forcing value

Yes

Command word containing the channel fallback value

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

TSX ASY

810

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

229

Bits and words

Details on analog function explicit exchange words

Module status word the word %[email protected] contains the module status word. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits in this word have the following meaning:

Address (1)

%[email protected]:X0

%[email protected]:X1

%[email protected]:X2

%[email protected]:X3

%[email protected]:X4

%[email protected]:X5

%[email protected]:X6

Meaning

Module failure

Faulty channel(s)

Terminal block fault

Self-testing in progress

Reserved

Configuration fault

Module is missing or off

%[email protected]:X7

%[email protected]:X8

%[email protected]:X9

%[email protected]:X10

%[email protected]:X11

%[email protected]:X12

%[email protected]:X13

%[email protected]:X14

Reserved

Possible FIPIO extension module failure

Faulty channel(s) on any FIPIO extension module

Terminal block fault on any FIPIO extension module

Self-testing in progress on any FIPIO extension module

Reserved

Configuration fault on any FIPIO extension module

Any FIPIO extension module missing or off

%[email protected]:X15

(1)

@module = module address.

l l xy for racked modules,

\p.2.c\m for remote modules.

Reserved

Status word for an input channel

Word %[email protected] contains the status word of a module channel. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits in this word have the following meaning:

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]:X0 Sensor link fault

%[email protected]:X1 Range under/overshoot fault

%[email protected]:X2 Terminal block fault

%[email protected]:X3 Reserved

%[email protected]:X4 Module failure

%[email protected]:X5 Configuration fault

230

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Bits and words

Address (1) Meaning

%[email protected]:X6 Communication fault

%[email protected]:X7 Value outside range

%[email protected]:X8 Channel not ready

%[email protected]:X9 Action rejected

%[email protected]:X10 Calibration fault

%[email protected]:X11 l Recalibration in progress for modules TSX AEY 1600 /

800 / 414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620, l Reserved for other modules.

%[email protected]:X12 l Recalibration mode for modules TSX AEY 1600 / 800 /

414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620, l Reserved for other modules.

%[email protected]:X13 l Forced channel, for modules TSX AEY 1600 / 800 / 414,

TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620, l Reserved for other modules.

%[email protected]:X14 l Recalibrated channel, for modules TSX AEY 1600 / 800

/ 414, TBX AES 400 and TBX AMS 620, l Range limit undershoot for modules TSX AEY 810 / 420

/ 1614, l Reserved for other modules.

%[email protected]:X15 l Aligned channel for modules TSX AEY 1600 / 800 / 414, l Range limit overshoot for modules TSX AEY 810 / 420 /

1614, l Reserved for other modules.

(1)

@module = module address.

l l xy for racked modules,

\p.2.c\m for remote modules.

Status word for an output channel

Word %[email protected] contains the channel status word. This is an explicit exchange word. The bits in this word have the following meaning:

Address (1)

%[email protected]:X0

Meaning l l

24 V supply fault for module TSX ASY 800,

Reserved for other modules.

Range under/overshoot fault %[email protected]:X

1

%[email protected]:X

2

Terminal block fault

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

231

Bits and words

Address (1)

%[email protected]:X

3

Meaning l l

Range limit overshoot by higher value if bit

%[email protected]:X1 is on 1 for module TSX ASY 800 and module TSX ASY 410 (Software version >= 2.0),

Reserved for other modules.

Module failure %[email protected]:X

4

%[email protected]:X

5

%[email protected]:X

6

%[email protected]:X

7

%[email protected]:X

8

%[email protected]:X

9

%[email protected]:X

10

%[email protected]:X

11

%[email protected]:X

12

Configuration fault

Communication fault

Value outside range

Channel not ready

Action rejected

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

%[email protected]:X

13

%[email protected]:X

14

Forced channel

Reserved

%[email protected]:X

15

(1)

@module = module address.

l l xy for racked modules,

\p.2.c\m for remote modules.

Reserved

232

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The regulation functions

II

Introduction

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the regulation functions on the Premium PLCs and describes its implementation with the PL7 Junior and Pro software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

8

9

10

11

12

13

Chaptername

General on the PID

Description of the regulation functions

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Characteristics of the functions

Example of application

Appendices

Page

235

239

259

271

275

285

233

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Regulation functions

234

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

8

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the standard regulation functions of the PL7 software.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

General introduction

Principal of the regulation loop

Development methodology of a regulation application

Page

236

237

238

235

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

General introduction

General The regulation functions are the standard elements of the PL7 language.

They support programming of the regulation loops of the Micro and Premium PLC’s.

These functions are particularly adapted to: l answering the needs of the sequential process which need the auxiliary adjustment functions (examples: Plastic film packaging machine, finishing treatment machine, presses…), l respond to the needs of the simple adjustment process’ (examples: metal furnaces, ceramic furnaces, small refrigerating groups…), l respond to the automatic control features or to the mechanical regulation which has a critical sampling time (examples: torque regulation, speed regulation).

A pre-configured interface with the CCX_17 range supports the driving and the adjustment of the regulation loops. In this area, up to 9 regulation loops are accessible via the CCX_17.

Available functions

Note: There is not a limit to the number of PID functions that are available in a function. In practice, it is the maximum number of input and output modules which are accepted by the PLC that limits the number of loops.

The standard regulation functions are split into two categories: l a family of algorithm functions: l l

PID function to execute a mixed PID correction (serial – parallel),

PWM function to execute the modulation adjustment period on the discrete l l outputs,

SERVO function to execute the motor command adaptations, an operator dialogue function (PID_MMI) which integrates a driving and adjustment application for the PID application on CCX_17 version 2.

The PID_MMI function is linked to 3 types of pre-configured screens.

236

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

Principal of the regulation loop

Introduction

Illustration l l

The working of a regulation loop has three distinct phases: l the acquisition of data and of: l l measurements from the process’ sensors (analog, encoders), setpoint(s) generally from PLC internal variables or from data from the

CCX_17.

execution of the PID regulation algorithm, the sending of orders adapted to the characteristics of the actuators to be driven via the discrete or analog outputs.

The PID algorithm generates the command signal from: l l l the measurement sampled by the input nodule, the setpoint value fixed by either the operator or the program, the values of the different corrector parameters.

The signal from the corrector is either directly handled by an analog output card of the PLC linked to the actuator, or handled via the PWM or SERVO adjustments in function with the kinds of actuator to be driven on a PLC discrete output card.

The following diagram schematizes the principal of a regulation loop.

Operator dialogue desk

CCX 17

Corrector

PLC

Adapter

Process to order

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

237

General on the PID

Development methodology of a regulation application

Diagram of the principal

The following diagram describes the linking of tasks to be carried out during the creation and debugging of a regulation application.

Note: The defined order is given for information only.

Application / Configuration

Configuration of interfaces

Discrete, Analog, Counts

Application / Data

Input data

constant, mnemonic,

numerical values

Programming: Ladder, List

MAST, FAST, SR

Regulation functions,

Operator dialogue

Animation tables

Variable table

PLC /Connector

Transfer of the application

in the PLC

Debugging

program

and adjustment

Debugging

by the CCX 17

238

File / Save

Storing of

the application

Documentation

Application

folder

Operating

the regulation

loops

Operating

the process via the

CCX 17

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Introduction

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the regulation functions.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Programming a regulation function

PID Function

Programming the PID function

PWM Function

Programming the PWM function

SERVO Function

Programming the SERVO function

Performance of the functions in the operating mode

9

Page

240

241

243

248

250

252

255

258

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

239

Description of the regulation functions

Programming a regulation function

Programming rules

The regulation function parameters must all be informed. The functions use 3 kinds l l l of parameters: read only parameters, considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, write only parameters, positioned at the conclusion of the function’s execution, the read and write only parameters, whose contents are considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, are then updated by the results of the function.

Note: The regulation functions must be programmed in a periodic task (MAST periodic or FAST). They must not be conditioned.

Parametering The word type input parameters are the analog sizes expressed in the scale [0,

+10000] and can be directly connected to measurement sensors via the words

%IWxy.i des analog inputs.

The bit type output parameters support ordering discrete actuators and can be directly connected to the %Qxy.i. type variables.

In the same way, the word type output parameters support ordering of analog actuators on the scale [0, +10000] and can be directly appointed to the %QWxy.i. type variables.

The MWi:L word table type parameters regroup the user parameters and the data necessary to the internal working of the function.

If the length of a table is sufficient, the function is not executed.

Note: In order to keep the adjustment parameters of the OF adjustment on cold start, it is necessary to delete the %MWi reset to zero option (in the processor’s configuration screen).

240

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

PID Function

General

Available functions

The PID function completes a PID correction via an analog measurement and setpoint on the [0-10000] format and provides an analog command to the same format.

The PID OF is composed of the following functions: l l l l l l l l l serial / parallel PID algorithm, forward / backward action (according to the KP gain sign), action derived from measurement or from distance, high and low limitation of the setpoint to [0-10000], high and low limitation of the output in automatic mode, anti-saturation of the integral action,

Manual/Automatic operating modes without definitely changing,

PID access control through the dialog operator, operating in integrator for (KP = TD =0).

l l

Note:

The display parameters used by the CCX 17 are shown in physical units,

For a correct PID operation, you must stay within the scale of [0-1000] for the measurement and the setpoint.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

241

Description of the regulation functions

Operating principles

The following diagram presents the operating principle of the PID function.

TS

CORRECTOR P.I.D

.

TI

The Setpoint branch

INTERNAL

SETPOINT

SET POINT

S.P

INTERNAL

MEASUREM

PROCESS

VALUE

P.V

10000

Limiter

0

Deviation Integrated

+

SETPOINT

USED

-

MEASUREMENT

USED

ε

0

1

Derivative action

Action derived on the measurement

PV_DEV

TD

d

dt

Derived

+

The PID action

The Measurement branch

+

+

KP

OUT_MAX

Limiter

OUT_MIN

The PID operation modes

1

AUTO

0

OUTP

OUT_MAN

Followed without repeated command attempts on Auto – Manu >switching

DIALOGUE OPERATOR CCX 17

- PV_MMI - PV_SUP

- SP_MMI - PV_INF

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming

the PID function, p. 243) module.

242

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the PID function

At a Glance PID functions are standard PL7 functions. They are therefore available from the function library.

This means that it is possible, by working with the language editors, to use assisted entry for a PID function in order to facilitate programming.

Note: A PID function can be entered in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function must not be subject to any conditions.

Illustration The illustration below shows the Functions screen in the library which can be used to implement the PID function.

EF

Function Information: Parameters

Family

Orphee function

Timer functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process control

Integer tables

Call format

V.Bib V.App

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.01 2.01

2.10

-

-

-

-

-

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID controller

Management of dedicated HMI on CCX17 for PIDs

Pulse Width Modulation of a numerical value

PID output stage for discrete valve control

FUNCTION parameters:

Name Type Nature

TAG STRING IN

UNIT STRING

PV WORD

IN

IN

OUT WORD OUT

Comment

Label of PID (8 char.), used by the HMI on CCX17

Unit of measurement (6 char.), used by the HMI>>

Process variable, format [0; +10000]

Output, format [0; +10000]

“TEMP”

Comment

“DEGRES”

%MW10

%MW11

Entry field

Display the call

PID ( “TEMP”,”DEGRES”,%MW10,%MW11,TRIG_PROD_A,%MW20:43 )

Syntax The call syntax for the PID function is:

PID(TAG,UNIT,PV,OUT,AUTO,PARA)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

243

Description of the regulation functions

Parameters of the PID function

The table below shows the different parameters of the PID function.

Parameter Type Nature

IN = Input

OUT =

Output

TAG IN 8 characters (maximum) or

%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 8

UNIT

PV

6 characters (maximum) or

%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 6

%MWi or %IWxy.i.j

IN

IN

Default value

Description

-

-

-

Name used for the PID used by the CCX 17.

Unit of measure for the PID used by the CCX

17.

OUT

AUTO

PARA

%MWi or %QWxy.i.j

%Mi , %Ixy.i or %Qxy.i

%MWi:43

OUT

IN / OUT

IN / OUT -

0

0

Input representing the process variable for the function.

Analog output of the PID.

If TI = 0, an offset of 5000 is added to the OUT output in Auto mode.

Operating mode of the PID and the CCX 17.

0: manual, 1 = Auto.

(See table below for details of PARA table).

The table below shows the different parameters of the PARA table:

Parameter

SP

OUT_MAN

KP

TI

TD

TS

Position

%MWi

%MW(i+1)

%MW(i+2)

%MW(i+3)

%MW(i+4)

%MW(i+5)

Function

Internal setpoint in 0/10000 format

Value of the manual output of the PID (between

0 and 10000)

Proportional gain of the PID (x100), with sign and without units (-10000<KP<+10000). The sign of

Kp determines the direction in which the PID acts

(negative: direct, positive: reverse)

Integral time of the PID (between 0 and 20000) expressed in 10

-1

seconds

Derivative time of the PID (between 0 and 10000) expressed in 10

-1

seconds

Sampling period of the PID (between 1 and

32000) expressed in 10

-2

seconds The actual sampling period will be a multiple of the task period in which the PID closest to TS is located

244

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Parameter

OUT_MAX

OUT_MIN

PV_DEV

NO_BUMP

DEVAL_MMI

PV_SUP (CCX 17)

PV_INF (CCX 17)

PV_MMI (CCX17)

SP_MMI (CCX 17)

Position

%MW(i+6)

%MW(i+7)

%MW(i+8):X0

%MW(i+8):X4

%MW(i+8):X8

%MW(i+9)

%MD(i+11)

%MD(i+13)

%MD(i+15)

Description of the regulation functions

Function

Upper limit of the PID output in auto mode.

(between 0 and 10000)

Lower limit of the PID output in auto mode.

(between 0 and 10000)

Derivative action chosen 0 = on process variable,

1 = on deviation

Bump or bumpless mode.

0 = bumps, 1 = no bumps

= 1 : inhibits acknowledgment of the PID by the

Human Machine Interface.

= 0 : the PID is used by the Human Machine

Interface.

This bit makes it possible to avoid having to carry out scale conversions on PIDs not being used by the CCX_17, and to select the PIDs being used, particularly when there are more than 9 PIDs in the PL7 application.

Upper limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -9 999 999 and +

9 999 999).

Lower limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -999 999 and + 9

999 999).

Image of the process variable in physical units

(x100)

Operator setpoint and image of the setpoint, in physical units (x100)

Note: l The other parameters used for internal management of the PID must never be modified by the application.

l The values used by the CCX 17 are multiplied by 100 so that they can be shown with 2 figures after the decimal point on the CCX 17 (the CCX 17 does not use floating point format but supports a fixed decimal point format).

245

Description of the regulation functions

Rules There is no alignment of the internal setpoint to the process variable in manual mode.

Scaling is only performed when one of the setpoints is modified (SP or DOP_SP).

The algorithm without integral action (TI = 0) performs the following operation:

For

ε t = SP – PV

The output is ...

Where ...

Dt= derivative action

The algorithm with integral action (TI <0) performs the following operation:

For

ε t = SP – PV

The output is ...

∆

OUT = KP [

∆ε ε ∆

Dt]/100 OUT

= OUT +

∆

OUT

Where ...

Dt= derivative action

Note:

Dt =

TD x Dt(t-1) - 10(PV - PV(t-1))

TD + TS

Examples

On cold start, the PID resumes in manual, with the output at 0. To impose automatic mode or a manual input not at zero after a cold start, you must program the initialization sequence after the PID call.

The examples provided below are in Ladder language.

Where the process control Human Machine Interface is used (DEVAL_MMI = 0)

(* PID correction on temperature process control loop *)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW11,%M10,%MW20:43)

246

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Where no Human Machine Interface is used DEVAL_MMI = 1.

(* PID correction on process control loop without built-in HMI

OPERATE

PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%IW3.1,%QW4.0,%M10,%MW20:43)

Note: In this example, the TAG and UNIT parameters are not applicable, so you can simply enter the values.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

247

Description of the regulation functions

PWM Function

General

Operating principles

The PWM function supports regulation of a pulse width on a TOR output. It is a function that formats the PID’s output.

The pulse width depends on the PID’s output (The PWM function’s INP input) and the modulation period.

The circuit diagram of the function’s operation is as follows:

PV

PID OUTP INP

PWM PW_O

SP

T_MOD

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming

the PWM function, p. 250) module.

248

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Pulse widths

Description of the regulation functions

To each TOP of the T_MOD modulation period, the activation period in 10

-3

second of the PW_O output is calculated according to the following formula:

State 1 of the gap (shown in 10

-2

seconds) = INP * T_MOD / 1000

The following timing diagram illustrates this formula:

PW_O

Modulation period

50% 75% 35%

Time

Width of pulse

Practical rules T_MOD = TS (where TS is the sampling period of the upstream PID),

The period of the current task (expressed in 10

-3

second) is equal to:

(Required resolution)* 10 * T_MOD .

The PID is in the MAST task, the MAST’s period is 50*10

-3

s, TS = 500*10

-2

s and the required resolution is 1/50 (a T_MOD period must contain at least 50 periods of the current task).

T_MOD = TS = 500.

The period of the task where the PWM is introduced must therefore be less than 500

* 10 /50 =100 10

-3

s.

The PWM function can therefore be programmed in the MAST task. the resolution will be 1/100.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

249

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the PWM function

Introduction The PWM function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PWM function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: The PWM function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or FAST).

The function does not have to be conditioned.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PWM function.

EF

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Orphee Function

Stalling functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.01 2.01

2.10

-

-

-

-

-

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID regulator

Comment

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from

Pulse width modulation of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

Parameters of the FUNCTION:

Name Type

INP

PARA

WORD

PW_O EBOOL

AR_W

Kind Comment

IN Numerical size to modulate

OUT Discrete output cyclic report equal to the LESS than value

IN/OUT PWM parameters (5 word table)

%MW11

%Q6.3

%MW90:5

Entry field

Call display

PWM ( %MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5 )

Syntax The PWM function’s call syntax is:

PWM(INP,PW_0,PARA)

250

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

The table below presents the different parameters of the PWM function. Parameters of the PWM function

Parameter Type Description

INP

PW_0

PARA

%MWi

%Qxy.i ou %Mi

%MWi:5

Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

IN

OUT

IN / OUT

Analog value to be modulated in the pulse width (format [0 – 10000])

Logic output (TOR) whose aspect ratio is the image of the INP input

Modulation period shown in 1/100ths of seconds (between 0 and 32767). T_MOD must be more than or equal to the current task’s period and it is adjusted by the system to be a whole multiple of this.

Table of 5 words whose first word corresponds to the T_MOD parameter.

The following are used internally by the function and must never be modified by the application

Examples The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

(* PID furnace regulation *)

OPERATE

PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW>>

(* Alignment of the T_MOD (PWM) on the TS of the PID *)

OPERATE

%MW90:=%MW105

(* Discrete output command in period modulation *)

OPERATE

PWM(%MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5) with PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW11,%M10,%MW100:43)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

251

Description of the regulation functions

SERVO Function

General The SERVO function supports regulation with a motor type actuator steered by 2 alternating actions (UP and DOWN).

Note: It must be connected in tandem with the analog output of a PID. It cannot be used alone.

When there is a copy of a position, the valve’s position is locked via the INP

(setpoint) and POT (position measurement) inputs.

When the copy does not physically exist, the algorithm no longer uses the PID’s absolute output but the output’s variation. The UP output (or DOWN, according to the variation sign) is put at 1 for a length of time proportional to the actuator opening time and to the variation of the value. Also the notion of minimum pulse time is introduced.

Principle of operating with a position copy

The SERVO function locks the motor’s position according to a setpoint of the INP position from a PID’s output on the [0-10000] format, and to a POT position measurement.

The locking algorithm is a relay with hysteresis.

In this case, the PID, T_MOTOR and T_MINI parameters are not used.

SERVO

PV

UP

OUTP INP

PID

+

SP

-

DOWN

POT HYST

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See

Programming the SERVO function, p. 255) module.

252

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Principle of operating without a position copy

(POT= -10000)

Example

Description of the regulation functions

In this case the SERVO function synchronizes itself with the upstream PID via the bias of the PID parameters table, passed in parameter to the SERVO function.

The algorithm receives in input the PID’s variation output and converts it into pulse period, according to the following formula:

T_IMP (shown in 10

-3

s) = OUT x T_MOTOR / 1000

The acquired period adds itself to the remaining period of the preceding cycles: in fact, what is not "consumed" in a cycle is memorized for the following cycles. This ensures a smooth operation especially with sudden variations of the (ex: PID setpoint level) command and in manual mode.

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See

Programming the SERVO function, p. 255) module.

The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

+20%

+2%

+2%

+24%

+22%

OUT

1 2 3 4 5

UP

DOWN

5 s 1 s

1 s

T_MOTOR = 25 s

T_MINI = 1 s

Caption:

1.

The PID variation output is of +20% (T_MOTOR pulse =25 s for a 100% variation), in this case the pulse affects the UP output for a period of 5 s,

2.

The PID variation is of +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. This pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.), and it does not affect the outputs,

3.

A second variation of +2% appears and the function holds this variation concurrently with the preceding one (which corresponded to a variation less than the minimal value) for its calculation, which corresponds to a positive global variation of

+4%, and therefore to a pulse of 1 s on the UP output,

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

253

Description of the regulation functions

4.

A variation of –24% appears and the activated pulse is therefore of 6 s on the

DOWN output,

5.

Before the following second, another variation of +22% brings the system back to a global variation of 2% < to the variation of T_MINI (4%). The function finishes carrying out the minimal pulse of 1 s.

Note 1: The SERVO function does not manage the position limits, these must be managed by the application. If a limit is detected, you must force the output corresponding to 0 (UP for the high limit, DOWN for the low limit).

Example: (done in Ladder language)

(* Management of limits *)

Limit_up

Limit_down

OPERATE

SERVO(Outp,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%M>>)

%Q2.1

R

%Q2.2

R

Note 2: Passing to the operating mode with copy to the mode without copy is possible (for example: when the copy has an error, go to mode without copy).

254

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the SERVO function

Introduction The SERVO function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a SERVO function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: The SERVO function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or

FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the SERVO function.

EF

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Bit tables

Integer tables

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.22

2.01

2.00

2.00

2.10

2.00

-

-

-

-

-

-

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID regulator

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID

Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

Parameters of the PROCEDURE:

Name Type

INP WORD

Kind Comment

Position setpoint, format [0;10000] (to conn>>

POT

UP

DOWN

WORD

EBOOL

EBOOL

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

Position copy, format [0;10000] [-10000>>

Alternating output, UP operating direction

Alternating output, DOWN operating direction

OUTP

-10000

%Q2.1

Comment

%MW100:43

Entry field

Call display

SERVO ( OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%MW100:43,%MW180:10 )

Syntax The SERVO function’s call syntax is:

SERVO(INP,POT,UP,DOWN,PID,PARA)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

255

Description of the regulation functions

Parameters of the SERVO function

Parameter

INP

POT

UP

DOWN

PID

PARA

The table below presents the different parameters of the SERVO function.

Type

%MWi

%MWi or direct

%Qxy.i or %Mi bit type %Q or

%M

%MWi:43

Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

IN

Description

IN

OUT

OUT

IN / OUT

Position setpoint ([0 – 10000] format) that has to be connected to the PID output.

Position copy, ([0 - 10000] format)

0 : closed valve; 10000: open valve.

If the copy does not exist. POT must be initialized at –10000.

This particular value indicates "no copy".

Output signal for the motor’s UP operating direction.

Output signal for the motor’s DOWN operating direction.

%MWi:10 IN / OUT

The PARA parameter table of the upstream PID. Used if there are no copy words for the synchronization with the upstream

PID. See

Parameters of the PID function, p. 244

.

(See the table below for the breakdown of the PARA table).

The table below presents the different parameters of the PARA table:

Parameter

T_MOTOR

T_MINI

HYST

Position

%MWi

%MW(i+1)

%MW(i+2)

Function

Valve opening time shown in 10

-2

s.

Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

Minimal pulse time shown in 10

-2

s.

Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

Value of the hysteresis on the [0 – 10000] format.

Used if the copy does not exist (POT: [0 - 10000]).

Note: l The other parameters that are used by the function’s internal management must never be modified by the application.

l All the parameters are obligatory, regardless of the operating mode.

256

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Examples

Description of the regulation functions

The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

Case with a position copy.

OPERATE

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

Case without a position copy.

OPERATE

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

257

Description of the regulation functions

Performance of the functions in the operating mode

Introduction

Cold start

Warm restart

This paragraph describes the performance of the functions in different starting l l l cases: cold start (new application, change of cartridge…), warm restart (power return without changing the application context), first execution after adding a function via modification in connected mode.

This type of start occurs for a new application or a change of cartridge.

On a cold start, the PLC can start automatically in RUN (according to the application’s configuration). The function correctors have a security performance: manual mode, outputs at 0. In addition, this supports the switching of the PLC into

RUN mode without carrying out the PID adjustment, then its debugging with the

CCX 17 (the adjustment can only be done in RUN).

This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.

With a power return after an outage (regardless of how long it lasted) and if the application context is not lost or modified, the functions go back to their state before the outage. If the user wants to use another performance, it is his responsibility to test the %S1 system bit and to associate the required processing to it (forcing in manual mode…).

Note: The PLC’s time-and-date stamp allows you find out the duration of the last outage.

Adding a new call in connected mode

Following the addition of a new function regulation call in connected mode, an identical initialization to the case of the cold start is carried out.

Note: In order to be seen as a new function, this must use a new parameter table.

Therefore, the removal of a PID, followed by adding a PID that uses the same parameter table is not considered as an addition of a new PID. In this case the PID is executed in the same state and with the same parameters as the preceding PID.

258

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

10

Introduction

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the operator dialogue on CCX 17.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Dialog operator on the CCX 17

Selecting a loop

Controlling a loop

Adjusting a loop

PID_MMI Function: programming

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

Page

260

262

263

264

265

269

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

259

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Dialog operator on the CCX 17

Introduction The CCX 17 permits viewing and control of all the modifiable parameters of a PID corrector without having to program a specific aplication.

The dialog operator function integrates a control and adjustment application on the

CCX 17 application’s PIDs. It provides management of 3 types of screens on the

CCX 17 supporting selection of a PID, viewing and controlling of this PID and adjusting the parameters of the PID. It inserts itself easily into any dialog operator application on the CCX 17.

Note: This function is only effective if the PLC is in RUN.

Limitations

What the keys do

Position of the keys

There is no limit to the number of PIDs in the application. On the other hand, a maximum of 9 PIDs are accessible via the dialog operator function on the CCX 17-

30 and on the CCX 17-30.

Navigating from one screen to another is done via the CCX’s command buttons and within screens via the up and down arrow buttons. The navigation offered is a

"vertical" navigation. You must always return to the loop selection screen to gain access to the values of other correctors.

The display is done over 4 lines (8 lines with the CCX 17-30) with the messages in

40 characters.

Fixed messages

Functions

The MOD key supports switching from display mode to input mode (in this case, the selected value starts flashing).

On the same screen, the input mode remains active for all the fields and pressing MOD again allows you to exit the input mode (stopping the flashing).

In input mode, the modification of a parameter is acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key.

MOD ENTER

260

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Set up principle

Operator dialogue on CCX 17 l l

Setting up the dialog operator is easy: the PID_MMI function(s) are started at each cycle (non-conditioned call), a single call to the PID_MMI function manages all the application’s PIDs.

However, a call from the PID_MMI function via CCX_17, which is connected to the PLC is necessary, l detection of the application’s PIDs via the PID_MMI function is automatic, including when adding or removing in RUN. Therefore there is no declaration to do, l Identification of the required corrector is done via the "TAG" parameter from the

PID function and its selection depends on the value of the function’s

"DEVAL_MMI" parameter. (Only acknowledged via the PID_MMI function, the

PIDs whose DEVAL_MMI parameter is = 0).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

261

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Selecting a loop

Introduction

Selection screen

Display

Ex

Rf

The number of PIDs operated by the CCX 17s is a maximum of 9 loops, regardless of the number of connected CCX 17s.

Ex 1 : TEMPERA

4 : FURNACE

7 : TANK

2 : DEBIT1 3 : DEBIT2

5 : LEVEL

8 : HOPPER

6 : BOILER

9 : MIXER

Rf LOOP SELECT : 0

Functions

This screen displays all the labels implemented in the

PL7.

A figure is associated to each label (from 1 to 9 maximum).

To control a loop, the operator must input the corresponding number.

After inputting the loop number, the loop controlling screen is displayed.

Pressing the Exit (Ex) button allows you to leave the regulation screens.

Pressing the Refresh (Rf) button allows you to refresh the screen. This operation must be performed after deleting or adding loops via the PL7 in connected mode.

Note: If the application has no accessible PID via the CCX 17 (whether there is no

PID in the application, or the PID’s existing DEVAL_MMIs are all at 1), the "NO

PID" message is displayed. The Exit and Refresh buttons keep their functions.

262

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Controlling a loop

Introduction

Selection screen

Display

This screen supports control over the setpoint, command and Manual/Auto mode values. The PV_INF and PV_SUP values are also displayed and controlable via this screen and they allow you to set the scale of the measurement in physical units.

Up

Dn

Up FURNACE AUTO

Dn

PV

SP

OUT

: 66,00 units

: 51,50

: 45,00

SUP : 100,00

INF : 100,00

Functions

The Manual/Auto screen is highlighted. Every time you press the associated command button you switch from one mode to the other.

In automatic mode, controlling an output is not authorized.

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys. The operating mode is as follows: as soon as the screen is displayed, it is the SP value which is selected (highlighted), then using the down arrow button, OUT (if manual), LESS and MORE.

Pressing MOD supports switching into input mode (press

MOD again to exit it).

The Dn button gives access to the adjustment screen and to return to the loop selection screen use the UP button.

(the PV, SP, OUT, LESS and MORE values are displayed as integers with 2 significant figures after the comma).

PV, SP, LESS and MORE are in physical units. OUT is in percentage.

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

263

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Adjusting a loop

Introduction This screen supports adjustment of the PID parameters (KP, TI, TD, TS) as well as the output limits OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX.

Selection screen

Display

Up Up

TI(s)

Ts(s)

OUT_MIN

FURNAC

E

KP

TD(s)

PV_DEV

OUT_MAX : 0,0

: 1,0

: -20,00

: 1,00

: 0,0

0

: 20,00

Functions

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys.

As soon as the screen is displayed, the KP value is displayed (highlighted).

The KP parameter has no unit. TI, TD and TS are in seconds. OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX are in percentage.

Pressing the Up button returns you to the loop controlling screen.

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

264

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

PID_MMI Function: programming

Introduction The PID_MMI function supports establishment of the dialog with the PLCs to which the CCX 17 is connected. A PID_MMI function is necessary via CCX 17 for the steering, the display and the adjustment of the application’s PIDs.

The PID_MMI function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PID_MMI function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: Inputting a PID_MMI function must be done in the task with the slowest period containing PIDs (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Example: An application with: l a FAST task at 10*10

-3

s containing PIDs, l a MAST task at 50*10

-3

s containing PIDs, the PID_MMI function must therefore be programmed in the MAST task.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PID_MMI function.

EF DFB

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Orphee Function

Stalling functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.10

-

-

-

-

2.01 2.01

-

PID

PWM

Name

PID_MMI

SERVO

Parameters of the FUNCTION:

Name

ADDR

Type

AR_W

EN EBOOL

BUTT AR_X

PARA AR_Y

Kind

IN

Comment

Topological address of the destination CCX17 [ta>>

IN/OUT Activation of DOP on CCX17

IN/OUT

IN/OUT

5 bit table linked to the command buttons>>

PID_MMI parameters [62 word table]

Comment

Mixed PID regulator

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID

Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

ADR#0.0.4

%M1

%M10:5

%MW45:62

Entry field

Call display

PID_MMI ( ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%MW10:5,%MW45:62 )

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

265

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Syntax

Parameters of the PID_MMI function

The PID_MMI function’s call syntax is:

PID_MMI (ADDR, EN, BUTT, PARA)

The table below presents the different parameters of the PID_MMI function.

Parameter

ADDR

EN

Type Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

Description

%MWi:6 IN

%Mi IN / OUT

CCX 17’s address

Activation of the regulation operator dialog.

The application puts this bit to 1 and the PID_MMI function puts it back to 0 when you exit the regulation operator dialog (press Ex)

BUTT

PARA

%Mi:5

%MWi:62

IN / OUT

IN / OUT

Bits associated to the CCX 17 buttons.

These bits allow you to drive different screens as well as Manual/Auto.

Parameters of the PID_MMI.

The first 4 are the words of the communication report.

Note: The 4 words of the report are the same as in all the asynchronous communication functions (communication OF, integrated OF DOP and OF

PID_MMI). However the OF PID_MMI automatically manages these words and the application never has to modify them. They are provided for information.

For more information, refer to the Dialog operator (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1).

Example of the CCX 17:

If the CCX 17 is connected directly to the PLC’s (UNI-TELWAY) AUX socket, it is at the UNI-TELWAY 4-5 slave addresses.

The coding can be done: l via immediate value: PID_MMI(ADR#{0.254}0.0.4,....) or simply:

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,....), l via a table of 6 words: %MW10:6 := ADR#0.0.4 PID_MMI(%MW10:6,...).

Synchronization of the dialog operator

The CCX 17 can be used to show screens other than the regulation screens. The IN bit is there to activate/deactivate the regulation dialog operator.

Setting IN to 1 activates the regulation operator dialog and is displayed on the PIDs’ selection screen.

266

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Examples

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

%MI is associated to the IN bit (display switch on the operator). The alarm management application is always activated, just like the regulation operator dialog.

(*Management of display communication on the CCX 17*)

%M1

%L1

(*DOP application for the display of screens relative to PL7 *)

P

OPERATE

SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%KW20.6,%MW30:5)

(*DOP application for the display of adjustment screens *)

OPERATE

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%M10:5,%MW45:62)

(*Exchange flag bit calculation in progress *)

%MW45:X0 MSG_in_progress

%MW200:X0 error ala_900

R

(*Send alarm upon error appearance *) error MSG_in_progress %M1 OPERATE

SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%KW140:29,%MW200:4) ala_900

S rz_ala_900

R

(* Cancellation of the alarm if it is sounded *) ala_900 rz_ala_900 OPERATE

PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%KW170:3,%MW200:4) rz_ala_900

S

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

267

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Management of the command buttons

When the PID_MMI is activated (IN at 1), it assigns the CCX 17 command buttons.

If the application uses these buttons for anything but regulation, they must be reassigned on the falling edge of IN (using the ASSIGN_KEYS function described in the DOP (See Manual Premium PLC applications volume 1)).

On the other hand, if the CCX 17 is only for regulation, it is advised that you carry out a non-conditioned SET of the IN bit in the application.

Selection of the

PIDs managed by the PID_MMI function

Each PID possesses a bit type DEVAL_MMI parameter. If this bit is at 1, the PID is not managed by PID_MMI. It is the only available level of protection. Moreover, if the application has more than 9 PIDs, it is the way to master those that are handled by the PID_MMI.

Alarm management

It is up to the user to program his/her own alarm management. This overlays itself on the management of the regulation screens.

If an alarm (coming from the dialog operator’s application) goes off while one of the

3 regulation screens is displayed, the CCX_17 is then dedicated to managing the alarm messages. When you return to the regulation operator dialog, the screen appears incomplete. Up/Dn or Refresh allows you to refresh this screen.

Several PID_MMI functions

It is possible to connect several CCX 17 terminals to the same PLC, so it can be useful to have several PID_MMI in the same application.

In this case, the different PID_MMI must be executed consecutively (no integrated

PID call) via the same PL7 task.

268

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

Introduction

Warm start l l l

This paragraph describes the performance of the PID_MMI function according to the different operating modes of the PLC and the CCX 17: warm restart, crossing into Run or Stop, reconnecting to the CCX 17.

This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.

If a problem such as a micro-outage on the PLC occurs while sending a message, the command is not repeated. It is therefore necessary to reinitialize the dialog by activating the IN bit via the application program.

STOP/RUN and

RUN/STOP crossing

In STOP, the PID_MMI function is no longer active. Nevertheless, you can still output parameters belonging to the displayed screen.

In STOP/RUN, the function goes back to the state it was in before crossing into

STOP.

Power outage or reconnecting to the CCX 17

With a power return or reconnection to the CCX 17, this reinitializes the communication with the PLC. Periodically, the PID_MMI reassigns the CCX 17’s command buttons. So after 20 seconds or more, pressing one of the first 3 buttons will display one of the regulation screens (preferably the Ref or Dn button on the left of the second row).

Note: Via the application, it is also possible to detect the presence of the CCX 17 by using the language words associated to the communication channels and to manage the dialog reset via the IN bit.

Cold start It is only on a cold start that the regulation screens are reset.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

269

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

270

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Characteristics of the functions

11

Introduction

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the characteristics.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Memory occupency

Function running time

Page

272

273

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

271

Characteristics

Memory occupency

Table The memory occupation of the functions is as follows:

Function

PID

PWM

SERVO

PID_MMI

Generated code volume

2,2 K words

2,2 K words

1,2 K words

4,4 K words

272

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Characteristics

Function running time

Table The running time of the functions is as follows:

Function Running time

Address

PID (TI=0 et TD=0) 1,2 ms (1 ms without

PID_MMI)

PWM

SERVO

PID_MMI (en=1)

0,6 ms

0,6 ms

1,3 ms

Symbol

1,7 ms (1,5 ms)

0,7 ms

0,8 ms

1,4 ms

Task

1,1 ms (0,9 ms)

0,5 ms

0,6 ms

1 ms

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

273

Characteristics

274

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Example of application

12

Introduction

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents an example of application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the application example

Configuration of the example

Programming the example

Page

276

278

281

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

275

Example

Description of the application example

Context This is about maintaining the water temperature of an open air swimming pool at a required value. This value itself is determined according to the ambient air temperature.

Air Temp.

TT

Water Temp

Measure

Reheater

Regul

Output

Setpoint calcualation Setpoint

Pump

A discrete regulation is generally used in this type of installation. It is suggested that in this example, you substitute it for a proportional regulation with a modulated output, which should support reduction in the size of the temperature oscillations around the required value.

Temperature required

Output

Discrete regulation Proportional regulation

T_CYCL

Measuring the water temperature as well as the ambient temperature is done using a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.

276

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Example

The setpoint of the water temperature depends on the exterior temperature according to the below law:

Temperature of the water

30°C

24°C

5°C

35°C

Temperature outside l l l l

A HIGH TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if the water temperature exceeds 32°C,

A LOW TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if it falls below 22°C,

A REGULATION ERROR alarm will go off if the SETPOINT/MEASUREMENT gap exceeds 2°C in either direction,

The regulation will become inoperative (output at 0) in case the pump stops.

277

Example

Configuration of the example

Hardware configuration

To execute this application you need: l l l l a TSX 57-103 PLC, a discrete TSX DEY 32D2K input module, a discrete TSX DSY 08R5A output module, a TSX AEY 414 analog input module.

The configuration is therefore as follows:

4

2

6

0

0

P

S

Y

0

T

S

X

5

7

1

0

3

1

3

2

D

2

K

D

E

Y

2

0

8

R

5

A

D

S

Y

3

A

E

Y

4

1

4

Allocation The discrete %Q2.0 output is allocated to the heater command.

The discrete %Q2.1 output is allocated to the pump command.

The discrete %Q2.2, %Q2.3 and %Q2.4 outputs are allocated to the alarms.

The %M0 bit is used to select the regulator’s AUTO/MANUAL operating mode.

The discrete %I1.1 and %I1.2 inputs support modification of the setpoint value in

AUTO mode and value of the output in MANUAL mode according to the following l l algorithm:

%I1.1 = 1 increase of 0.1% per cycle,

%I1.2 = 1 decrease of 0.1% per cycle.

The %I1.3 input provides the state of the pump.

%IW3.0 and %IW3.1 are the analog input values.

278

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Example

Circuit diagram of the regulation loops

The PID’s regulator direction is in REVERSE (an increase of the measurement must correspond to a decrease of the output).

Water

Temp.

Air Temp.

Monitoring overheats driving

Monitoring overheats heater

Probe

Pt100

Probe

Pt100

Th J

Th K

TSX AEZ 414

Measure

%IW3.0

%IW3.1

%IW3.2

%IW33

+

-

Setpoint

PID

EXIT

PID1

AUTO

MANU

Setpoint

Calculation

To resistance of heating

%Q4.0

PWM

Configuration Rack configuration

1

2

Slot

0

3

Family

Processors

Discrete

Discrete

Analog

Reference

TSX 57103

TSX DEY 32D2K

TSX DSY 08R5A

TSX AEY 414

0

1 l

Channe Address

%Q2.0

%Q2.1

Parametering of the TSX DEY 32D2K module channels

7

..

31

5

6

3

4

1

2

Channel

0

Address

%I1.0

%I1.1

%I1.2

%I1.3

%I1.4

%I1.5

%I1.6

%I1.7

..

%I1.31

-

..

-

Symbol

-

Consig_increm

Consig_decrem

Etat_pompe

Act_pompe

-

Valid_dop_reg

Task

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

..

MAST

Parametering of the TSX DSY 08R5A module channels

Symbol Task Fallback value Resetting

Com_rechauf

Com_pompe

MAST

MAST

Fallback mode

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Programmed

Programmed

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

279

Example

4

5

2

3

6

7 l

Channe Address

%Q2.2

%Q2.3

%Q2.4

%Q2.5

%Q2.6

%Q2.7

Symbol

-

-

Alarm_temp_haut

Alarm_temp_bas

Alarm_def_reg

-

Task

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

MAST

Fallback mode

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback

Fallback value Resetting

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Fallback to 0

Programmed

Programmed

Programmed

Programmed

Programmed

Programmed

Parametering of the TSX AEY 414 module channels

Range Scale Min Max Unit Chann el

0

Address Symbol

%IW3.0

Temp_eau Pt100 User 0 500 °C

Filtering Task

0 MAST

1

2

3

%IW3.1

%IW3.2

%IW3.3

Temp_air

Surchauf

_moteur

Surchauf

_rechauf

Pt100 User

Thermo J User

Thermo K User

-200 800

0

0

°C

1000 °C

1000 °C

0

0

0

MAST

MAST

MAST

Wiring test

Inactiv e

Inactiv e

Inactiv e

Inactiv e

Bit

Internal (%M): 256

System (%S): 128

Configuration of the bits, words and function blocks

Words

Internal (%MB,%MW,%MD,%MF): 512

System (%SW,%SD): 128

Common (%NW): 0

Constant (%KB,%KW,%KD,%KF): 128

Function blocks

Serial timer(s) 7 (%T): 0

Timer(s) (%TM): 64

Monostable(s) (%MN): 8

Counter(s) (%C): 32

Register(s) (%R): 4

Drum(s) (%DR): 8

280

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Example

Programming the example

Proposed processing method

MAST-MAIN

The block PID1 is assigned to temperature process control. The temperature setpoint is calculated on the basis of the ambient temperature.

On reconnection to the mains, the process control operating mode is selected and the pump is started.

The state of the controller is conditioned by the operating state of the pump. If the pump is faulty the PID switches to MANU and the output is forced to 0.

The status word bits (process value high threshold, process value low threshold, deviation high threshold and deviation low threshold) are used to generate alarms.

The PID loop coefficients will be initialized to: l l l

KP = 600

TI = 300

TD = 50

The display on the CCX is as follows: l l

KP = 6

TI = 30 l TD = 5

These values can of course be fine-tuned during a subsequent adjustment phase.

(*Initialization of constants on cold restart-> PID loop buffer and initialization of PWM period to 10 s*)

%LO

%SW10:XO OPERATE

%MW10:10:=%KW10:10

OPERATE

%MW55:=1000

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

281

Example

282

(*Pump activation *)

%L1O

%I1.4

%Q2.1

(* PID loop controller operating mode management. This program allows the CCX17 to modify the A/M bit *)

%L11

%I1.3

P

%I1.3

N

OPERATE

%MW11:=0

(* Initialization of water temperature setpoint to 27 °C *)

OPERATE

%MW10:=5400

(* Execution of the temperature process control loop *)

%L12

%M10

S

%M10

R

OPERATE

(1)

OPERATE

PWM(%MW53,%Q2.0,%MW55:5)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

(* Management of process value alarms *)

%L15

COMPARE

%IW3.0>6400

COMPARE

%IW3.0<4400

(* Management of deviation alarms *)

%L16

OPERATE

(%MW60:=%IW3.0-%MW10)

COMPARE

%MW60>400

COMPARE

%MW60<-400

(* PID loop controller on CCX17 *)

%L20

%Q2.2

%Q2.3

%Q2.4

OPERATE

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%I1.6,%MO:5,%MW100/62)

%I1.6

S

Example

283

Example

284

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Appendices

13

At a Glance

Overview

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter reviews several aspects of the process control application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

PID parameter adjustment method

Role and influence of PID parameters

Page

286

288

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

285

Appendices

PID parameter adjustment method

Introduction

Closed loop adjustment

Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and

Nichols which have two variants: l l closed loop adjustment, open loop adjustment.

Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction: l if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement, make the PID inverted (KP > 0), l on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).

This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.

Measure

286

Tc time

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

-

PID

PI

Kp Ti Td

Kpc/1,7 Tc/2 Tc/8

Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses.

In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Open loop adjustment

Appendices

As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .

Output

S

Measure

Integrator Process response t

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

M = S

Tu Tg t

The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size

(% of the scale) as the regulator output.

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

-

PID

PI

Kp

-1,2 Tg/Tu

-0,9 Tg/Tu

Ti

2 x Tu

3,3 x Tu

Td

0,5 x Tu

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the value obtained for KP by 100.

This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures

(glass industry,…) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.

287

Appendices

Role and influence of PID parameters

Influence of proportional action

Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. The higher the gain, the faster the response, and the lower the static error (in direct proportion), though the more stability deteriorates. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Kp too high

Kp correct

°C

Static error

Kp too low t

288

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Influence of integral action

Appendices

Integral action is used to cancel out static error (deviation between the process value and the setpoint). The higher the level of integral action (low Ti), the faster the response and the more stability deteriorates. It is also necessary to find a suitable compromise between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Ti too high

Ti correct

C

Ti too low

Note: A low Ti means a high level of integral action.

where Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and Td = derivative time.

t

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

289

Appendices

Influence of derivative action

Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of the speed of variation in the deviation, which makes it possible to anticipate changes by accelerating process response times when the deviation increases and by slowing them down when the deviation decreases. The higher the level of derivative action (high Td), the faster the response. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Td too high

C

Td too low

Td correct t

290

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Limits of the PID control loop

If the process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:

( )

= K

(

(

1

( ) p

+

θ p

)

) where:

τ

=model delay,

θ = model time constant,

100%

Measure = M

0

+ ∆ M

∆ M

Measure = M

0

τ θ t

The process control performance depends on the ratio

τ

The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2- -20

τ

θ delay (high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more complex algorithms should be used.

τ

For >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

291

Appendices

292

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Weighing Application

III

At a glance

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the application-specific Weighing function on the TSX/PCX57

PLC and describes its implementation with the PL7 Pro and Junior software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Chaptername

General Introduction to the Weighing Dedicated Function

Configuration of the Weighing application

Weighing programming

Calibrating the measurement string

Debugging the weighing function

Protecting the adjustments

Operating a weighing application

Diagnostics of the weighing application

Examples of the weighing program

Page

295

305

321

361

371

379

385

391

395

293

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Weighing Application

294

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General Introduction to the

Weighing Dedicated Function

14

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter introduces the weighing dedicated function on TSX/PCX 57 PLCs.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the weighing package

Operation of the weighing module

Implementing the Weighing Application

Weighing Application Terminology

Page

296

298

300

302

295

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General Introduction

Description of the weighing package

General

Illustration

The whole weighing package consists of: l l l the weighing module, a weight indicator, sensors.

The application specific weighing function supports software implementation of a weighing application around this hardware device.

The below illustration shows the standard elements of the weighing package.

2

1

3

296

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description

General Introduction

The following table describes the elements of the weighing package.

Address Element

1 Weighing module

2

3

Weight indicator

Sensors

Description

The ISP Y101 weighing module is the central element in the weighing string. It has: l l l a measurement input able to receive up to 8 sensors, a link for the display panel,

2 "discrete" reflex outputs for adjusted dosage applications.

The TSX XBT H100 remote display panel displays the measured weight with no previous configuration.

Detection of the measurement occurs through the strain gauge sensors.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

297

General Introduction

Operation of the weighing module

General

Circuit diagram

In the PLC’s environment, the module has its own set of data in the same way as the other modules.

This information is used for the exchanges (reports and commands) with the processor.

The following circuit diagram of the operation shows the processes executed by the module and supports access to all the elements to be configured.

3

Processor exchange

Sensors

Processing the measure

1

Monitoring the measure

2

Display

4

5

Outputs management

298

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description of operation

General Introduction

The following table describes the different operation phases of the module.

Phase Operation

1 Processing the measurement

Description

The signal from the weighing sensors is: l l converted, the measurement is filtered according to the choice made on the configuration screen, l put on the scale, the scale’s characteristics are determined from a calibration.

2 Monitoring the measurement

3 Exchanges of data with the processor

The measurement coming from the process undergoes the following checks: l l monitoring the underload, monitoring the stability defined by a stability format and a stability time, l monitoring the presence of anything in the zero zone.

The module receives and processes the commands from the processor (Set to zero, tare mode semi-automatic, …).

It also prepares the data in a suitable format for display on the TSX

XBT H100.

It sends various information up to the processor such as the gross weight, the net weight, the debit, the tare and the statuses.

4 Displaying the data

5 Output management

The TSX XBT H100 displays the manual weight and tare in the unit chosen in the configuration as well as 4 extra pieces of information: the net weight, the stability, the presence of anything in the zero zone and the unit of the weight.

The card can directly manage 2 discrete outputs and control them according to the thresholds transmitted to the module by the application program.

The elements used to manage this are: l l l the transfer thresholds, the weight development direction (Weighing or Down weighing), the logic of output transfer.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

299

General Introduction

Implementing the Weighing Application

At a Glance Implementing the weighing application requires the physical context in which it will be executed (rack, supply, processor, modules or devices, etc.) to be defined and implementation of the software to be carried out.

This latter aspect is performed by the different PL7 editors: l l either in local mode, or in offline mode.

Implementation

Principle

Mode

Local

Local or connected

The table below presents the different dedicated weighing function implementation phases.

Phase Description

Declaring the module Choice: l l of geographical position: number and slot of module in the rack, of the module type.

Configuring the module channels (See Configuration of the Weighing application,

p. 305

)

Entering configuration parameters.

Enabling a new module.

Enabling configuration parameters. (See Manual

Premium PLC applications volume 1)

Globally confirming the application (See Manual

Premium PLC applications volume 1)

Enabling a new application.

Symbolization (See

Presymbolization, p. 327 )

Programming (See

Weighing programming,

p. 321

)

Symbolizing variables associated with the application-specific function.

Programming functions the application should perform using: bit and word objects associated with the module,

300

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Mode

Connected

Local or connected

Connected

Connected

General Introduction

Phase

Transfers

Description

Transfers the application to the PLC.

Calibration (See Calibrating the measurement string ,

p. 361 )

Calibrating the measuring circuit.

Debug (See Debugging the

weighing function, p. 371

)

Debugging the application using: l debug help screens, which allow the status of inputs and outputs to be visualized, l diagnostics screens, which allow faults to be identified.

Protecting adjustments made.

Protecting adjustments (See

Protecting the adjustments,

p. 379 )

Documentation Printing different information that relates to the application.

Operation (See Operating a

weighing application, p. 385 )

Operating the application using: l debug help screens, which allow the principal information about the weight measurement to be visualized.

l TSX XBT H100 remote displays.

Protecting parameters associated with the measurement.

Diagnostics (See

Diagnostics of the weighing

application, p. 391

)

Note: The order below is purely for indication purposes, as PL7 software allows editors to be used interactively in whichever order is desired. (Nevertheless, you can use the data or program editors without having configured the weighing module in advance).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

301

General Introduction

Weighing Application Terminology

Limit Load (Lim) The maximum static load that can be supported by the instrument, without permanently altering its meteorological qualities.

Zero Load

Set to Zero

Device

Tare weight of load receiver when equipped with its mechanical accessories

(vibratory extractor, screw, trap, screw jack, etc.). It does not appear in the weight indication but must be taken into account when calculating the maximum load of the sensors.

Device allowing the indicator to be "recalibrated" in the event of a deviation from zero (due to dirt accumulation, for example). This operation can only be carried out in the extent of zero calibration range (+/-2% or +/-5% of the maximum range according to the weighing instrument).

Tare Predefining

Device

Device allowing a predefined tare value to be subtracted from a gross weight value and indicating the result of the calculation. The weighing range is consequently reduced.

Tare Device l l

Device allowing the instrument indication to be moved to zero when a load is positioned on the load receiver: without encroaching on the weighing range of net loads (tare additive device),

or reducing the weighing range of net loads (tare subtracting device, such as

TSX ISP Y101).

(Weighing

Instrument)

Indicator Device

Part of load measuring device from which direct reading of result is obtained (TSX

XBT H100).

Part of instrument that will receive the load.

Load Receiver

Device

Scale Division Value in mass units, expressing the difference between two consecutive indications for one numerical indication.

Calibration Graduates a piece of measuring apparatus.

Weighing Range Interval between maximum and minimum weight.

302

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

General Introduction

Weighing

Instruments

Non-Automatic

Functioning

Weighing

Instruments

Measuring instruments, which determine the mass of a body using the force of gravity.

These instruments can also be used to determine other sizes, quantities, parameters or characteristics linked to the mass. According to the way they function, weighing instruments are either classified as automatic or non-automatic functioning instruments.

Weighing instruments that require the intervention of the operator during the weighing process, in order to deposit loads on the load receiver device and retrieve loads from it, for example, as well as to obtain the result. These instruments allow the weighing result to be directly observed, either displayed or printed out. The two possibilities are covered by the word "indication".

The science of weights and measures.

Metrology

Lead Sealing

Gross Weight

Sealing a piece of apparatus with lead. The positioning of a rider in the weighing module ensures this function.

The objective of this device is to guarantee measurement conformity. The accessible parameters only have influence on the aspects of the automatic action's exploitation of module information. the unit, weight, scale division, etc, are read only).

Indication of the load weight on an instrument when no tare or predefining device has been used.

Net Weight (Net) Weight indication of a load placed on an instrument after a tare device has been used.

Net weight = Gross weight - Tare weight

Maximum Weight

(Max)

Maximum weighing capacity, not taking account of the additive capacity of the tare.

Minimum Weight

(Min)

Load value under which weighing results can be marred by a relative error that is too large.

Tare

Taring

Load placed on the load receiver along with the product to be weighed. For example: product packaging or container.

Action allowing the instrument indication to be moved to zero when a load is positioned on the load receiver.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

303

General Introduction

Tare Value (T) Weight value of a load, determined by a tare weighing device.

Predefined Tare

Value (PT)

Numerical value, representing a weight, which is entered into the instrument at configuration or by program.

Zero Tracking Device allowing slow derivations from zero to be made up, within the limits of the extent of the zero range.

304

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration of the Weighing application

15

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes how to select and modify the parameters of the weighing module’s configuration.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen

Weighing Module Configuration Parameters

How to modify the task parameter

How to modify metrological information

How to modify the zero

How to modify the data format

How to modify the stability

How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering

How to Modify the Flow Calculation

How to Modify the Tare

How to Modify the Threshold Check

Page

306

307

308

309

311

312

313

314

316

317

318

305

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Description of the Dedicated Weighing Function Configuration Screen

General

Illustration

The configuration information allows measuring characteristics to be defined and the module's operation to be adapted to the application it is intended for.

This screen gives access to the visualization and modification of configuration parameters.

1

2

TSX ISP Y101 [RACK 0 POSITION 4]

Configuration

Designation: 1I. WEIGHING 3 FILTERS

3

Symbol:

Channel: Function:

Weighing

Task:

MAST

Metrological Data

Unit:

Max Range (MR):

Scale Division (d):

Overload Threshold:

Threshold check

Active

Direction:

Weighing

S0 kg

150

0.01

+9d

LF Mask Time:

0

Outputs Active Phase 1: s

.00

S0 and S1 kg

Downweighing

Zero

Recalibration range:

Zero Tracking

:±2%MR

Stability

Format range:

Time:

3

1

/.e

s

Flow

Calculate on 4

Tare

Predefined

Value: 0.1

measurements kg

Cut-off points

Low Flow (LF)

High Flow (HF)

0.0000

0.0000

kg kg

Format of data

Legal

High resolution

Filtering

F1:

F2: 0

4

F3: 0

T

Description The table below introduces the different zones on the configuration screen.

Address Element

1

2

3

Title bar

Function

Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position as well as the rack number.

Module zone Allows the type of screen to be selected: l l l

Configuration

Calibration, only accessible in offline mode,

Debug

,

only accessible in offline mode.

Displays the designation of the selected module.

Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View

→

Module Zone command.

Channel zone Gives access to modification of the module's parameters.

306

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

Weighing Module Configuration Parameters

Parameters List

Parameters

Task

Metrology/Unit

Metrology/Max Weight

Metrology/Scale division

150

0,01

Metrology/Overload threshold +9 d

Zero/Zero tracking

Zero/recalibration range

Data format

Stability/Extent of Range

Stability/Time

Filtering/Coefficients

F1

F2, F3

Flow/Calculation

Tare

Threshold check

LF mask time

Output logic

Phase 1 active outputs

Cut-off points LF and HF

The following table lists the parameters, which can be accessed during configuration.

Possibilities Unit

Legal

3

1

Default configuration

Mast kg

Inactive

+/-2% MW

4

0

4

Not predefined

Inactive

0

Weighing

S0

0

Mast or Fast kg g t lb oz

<none> from 0 to 65,535

1, 2 or 5 10 n

+9 d

+2% PM

+5% PM

Inactive or active

+/-2% MW,

+/-5% MW

Legal

High resolution

2, 3, 4, 6 or 8

0.4, 0.5, 0.7 or 1 from 0 to 19

kilogram gram ton (metric) pound (=453g) ounce (=28.35g) no unit in the weight unit chosen in the weight unit chosen

-

scale divisions

% of Max W

% of Max W

-

1/4 of the scale division seconds

-

2, 8, 4, 16 32 or 64 measurements

Not predefined or predefined in the weight unit chosen

Inactive or Active -

0 to 1.5 seconds per 0.1s step seconds

Weighing or Downweighing

S0 or (S0 and S1) from 0 to Max W

-

in 1/100 of the unit

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

307

Configuration

How to modify the task parameter

At a glance This parameter defines the task processor in which the input acquisition and the output update take place.

The possible choices are: l l

The

The

MAST

FAST

task

task

Note: Modifying this parameter is only possible in local mode.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for defining the task type assigned to the module.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen from the weighing module.

From the pull-down menu, click Task .

Result: a drop-down list appears.

MAST

MAST

FAST

Task

3

4

Select the required task.

If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

308

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to modify metrological information

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following metrological information.

Designation

Unit

Maximum Range

(MR)

Grade

Overload threshold

Description gives you the choice of unit of weight: l l l l l l g kg t : ton (metric) lb

: gram oz

: kilogram

: pound (lb = 453g)

: ounce (oz = 28.35g) none : no unit

This is the maximum load that it is possible to weigh with the instrument, without considering the weight of the empty load holder (on legal format

(See

How to modify the data format, p. 312 )).

The grade’s value is of the 1, 2 or 5 format that multiplies 10 n

(n being a positive, negative or non integer with |n| less than or equal to 3.

Example: for a grade of 0.002 (if the unit chosen is kg), the measurement is increased 2g at a time.

This threshold is the value of the surplus weight that the display panel no longer indicates (the overload is therefore indicated by a ‘>‘ line on the display panel).

It can take these values: l l l

+9 grades

+2% of the maximum range

+5% of the maximum range

Example: the maximal range has been established at 150 kg and the grade at 10 g. According to the user’s choice, the utilization limit will be for: l l l

9 grades: Max Range + 9 grades is 150.09 kg

+2%MR: 102% of Max Range is 153 kg

+5%MR: 105% of Max Range is 157.5 kg

Note: the underload threshold cannot be parameterized: it sets the tolerated identifier limit to below zero. It is -2% of the maximum range

(underloading is therefore indicated by a ‘<‘ line on the display panel).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

309

Configuration

Procedure

Note: Because of the industrial environment, select a resolution higher than 3000 pulses as a serious installation precaution.

With the programming screen, it will not be possible to enter a higher resolution than 50000 pulses.

In other words the following imbalance must be considered:

Max Range (RM) ≤ 50000 x Grade.

The table below introduces the procedure for setting metrological information.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the weighing module’s hardware configuration screen.

Select the values of the Unit , Grade or Overload threshold parameters by using the drop-down lists and enter the Max Range value.

If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

310

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to modify the zero

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following information for adjusting the zero.

Designation

Format print recalibration range

Zero follower

Description

Each zero shift register can be corrected so that it will not go over this print range.

It is defined in % of the maximum range. It can take the values: l l

+/- 2% PM (+/- 2% of the maximum range)

+/- 5% PM (+/- 5% of the maximum range)

This optional function supports correction of any slow losses of accuracy of the zero in the print range of the format (+/- 2% of the maximum range).

It is not advised to select this option in automatic installations.

Procedure

Note: The difference between a slow drift and a real weighing is based on the following rule: all variations of weights lighter than a half-grade whose repetition frequency is sufficiently weak to conserve the stability of the measurement is considered as a drift. The correction created by the function is limited to +/-2% of the counter output’s maximum range. When this limit has been passed, there is no automatic correction.

The table below introduces the procedure for setting the zero.

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen from the weighing module.

Select the format’s print range by using the drop-down lists.

If necessary, tick the Zero follower box to confirm this function.

If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

311

Configuration

How to modify the data format

At a glance The configuration screen supports selection of the measurement’s display format.

l l

The value of the weight is given to or entered by the user: either in a fixed point physical unit: legal format or in a hundredth of a fixed point physical unit: high resolution

Note: A fixed point physical unit is called a whole number shown as a unit of weight where a comma can be put.The position of this is given by the grade to the power of ten.

Example

Procedure

Legal format: The value 3014 means 301.4 kg if the grade is worth 2.10-

1 kg.

High resolution format: The value 301403 means 301.403 kg if the grade is worth

2.10-

1 kg. This unit offers more accuracy but it is not accepted by the legal Metrology department.

The table below introduces the procedure for the data format.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the weighing module’s hardware configuration screen.

Check the format of the required data.

If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

312

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to modify the stability

At a glance The configuration screen offers the following parameters to set the stability.

Designation

Format print range

Time

Description

A weight cannot be measured immediately after receiving a load because the inevitable oscillations affect the mechanical part.

The stability format shows the size below which the measurement is considered stable.

It is parameterized on 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8 quarters of a grade.

The stability time shows how long the measurement must stay in the stability format before it is considered stable.

It is parameterized on 0.4, 0.5, 0.7 or 1 second.

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for setting the stability.

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the weighing module’s hardware configuration screen.

Select the format’s print range by using the drop-down list.

Select the stability time by using the drop-down list.

If need be, confirm the reconfiguration.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

313

Configuration

How to Modify Measurement Input Filtering

At a Glance

Measurement

Phases

Filters concern the measurement input of the weighing sensors.

By default. PL7 offers a unique filter, which is defined for the total duration of the weighing action.

To increase the speed/precision performance of weighing, 3 distinct filters can be used for one weighing action, as follows: l l l filter F1 associated with phase 1 (default phase), filter F2 associated with phase 2, filter F3 associated with phase 3.

Each filter can either have: l a sliding average (filtering coefficients from 1 to 11), where the measurement is the average of the last n values, l or be of second order (filtering coefficients from 12 to 19), which are referenced by their cut-off frequencies.

l l l

The different phases of a continuous weighing action can be broken down into: a phase 1, where speed is the prime feature of control precision (High flow), a measurement refining phase 2 (Low flow), a final phase 3, where the measurement value differs very little and requires a high level of precision (Residual flow).

314

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Filter

Coefficients

Procedure

Configuration

The following list gives the meanings of filter coefficients:

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

15

16

17

18

19

5

6

3

4

1

2

Value Filter type

0 none sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average sliding average second order filter second order filter second order filter second order filter second order filter second order filter second order filter second order filter

Characteristics not filtered average of the last 2 measurements average of the last 3 measurements average of the last 4 measurements average of the last 5 measurements average of the last 8 measurements average of the last 16 measurements average of the last 25 measurements average of the last 32 measurements average of the last 40 measurements average of the last 50 measurements average of the last 64 measurements cut-off frequency at 15 Hz cut-off frequency at 10 Hz cut-off frequency at 8 Hz cut-off frequency at 6 Hz cut-off frequency at 4 Hz cut-off frequency at 2 Hz cut-off frequency at 1 Hz cut-off frequency at 0.8 Hz

The table below introduces the procedure for defining filtering:

Step

1

2

3

4

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the weighing module.

If filters F2 and F3 are being used, check the Active box, located in the

Threshold Check field.

For each phase, select the filtering coefficient from the drop-down menu.

Confirm reconfiguration if necessary.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

315

Configuration

How to Modify the Flow Calculation

At a Glance

Functioning

Example

Procedure

You can choose the number of measurements for calculating the flow. (One measurement is taken every 20 milliseconds).

The flow is calculated using the following formula:

Flow n = (Valn - Valn-b)

This is a difference of the value of filtered weights for a number of configured measurements.

l l l

Where: b is the number of measurements for the flow calculation,

Valn and

is the value of filtered weight at the instant n,

Valn-b is the value of filtered weight at the instant n-b.

At each instant, the frequency is calculated and implicitly sent back to the processor as the weight measurement, in order to allow threshold corrections.

The flow is always calculated in high resolution format.

This calculation can be done on 2, 4,8, 16, 32 or 64 measurements.

By default, the number of measurements is 4.

The following figure illustrates a calculation on 4 measurements. n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5

20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms flow n flow n+1 flow n+4 = Val n+4 - Val n flow n+5 = Val n+5 - Val n+1

The table below introduces the procedure for defining the flow calculation.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the weighing module.

Select the number of measurements using the drop-down menu.

Confirm reconfiguration if necessary.

316

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Configuration

How to Modify the Tare

At a Glance The Tare is the weight measurement memorized during the last semi automatic

Taring command.

However, if necessary, you can introduce a tare value manually. Therefore, this tare value is known as "predefined" or "manual" and can be transmitted to the module. It is expressed in legal format (phys. unit with fixed decimal point).

The tare must be positive or zero and be lower than the Max. Weight.

Once a device of this sort is used, the "predefined" tare (PT) indicator is positioned.

It is no longer valid once a Taring order is executed.

Procedure

Note: The entry format extends from 0 to 65,535. If the user wants a greater tare, s/he must modify the scale division and enter the tare accordingly.

The table below presents the procedure for defining a predefined tare and the tare value.

Step

1

2

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the weighing module.

If necessary, check the Predefined box to confirm this function.

3

4

Note: If the box is already checked, you must firstly: l l l uncheck this box, confirm the configuration screen, check the Predefined box again.

Enter the tare value.

Confirm the reconfiguration.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

317

Configuration

How to Modify the Threshold Check

At a Glance The threshold check manages the module's discrete outputs: l l

The

The

High flow cut-off point

Low flow cut-off point is associated with output S0.

is associated with output S1.

The configuration screen gives the following threshold check information.

Designation

Active

Direction

Phase 1 active outputs

Cut-off points

LF (Low Flow) mask time

Description

Discrete output management is in operation if this box is checked.

It is not checked by default.

The detection direction corresponds to the direction in which the thresholds are recognized, in either: l l

Weighing (filling)

Downweighing (emptying)

This is the concept of exceeding by a greater value, in the case of weighing, or by a lower value, in the case of downweighing.

By default, Weighing is selected.

The choice concerns the control of the S0 output on its own, or the S0 and S1 outputs at the same time.

See the explanation that follows.

By default, the module only activates S0 in the first phase.

The measurement can be associated with 2 thresholds for the following dosages: A High Flow cut-off point and a Low Flow cut-off point .

Depending on the logic defined, the S0 and S1 outputs go to zero when these thresholds are met.

The threshold values allowed lie between 0 and the maximum weight.

They are expressed in high resolution (one hundredth of a physical unit with fixed decimal point).

It defines the time after the high flow cut-off, during which the module no longer checks the Weight/Threshold;

This is to mask the overshoot caused when the product has a drop in voltage. The values allowed lie between 0 and 1.5 seconds per 1/10th sec step.

See the explanation that follows.

By default, this time is zero.

318

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Activating

Outputs

Configuration

The following illustration describes the output functioning differences between the choice of active phase 1 Outputs: S0 or S0 and S1.

Active output phase 1 (S0)

Net Weight

Weighing

Low flow cut-off point

High flow cut-off point

Net Weight

Downweighing

High flow cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Time

Low flow cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Time

Active output phase 1 (S0and S1)

Net Weight

Weighing

Low flow cut-off point

High flow cut-off point

Net Weight

Downweighing

Output S0

Output S1

Time

High flow cut-off point

Low flow cut-off point

Output S0

Output S1

Time

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

319

Configuration

Masking Time The following illustration shows the role of the masking time, the role of which is to mask the overshoot caused when the product has a drop in voltage.

Net Weight

False cut-off point

Weighing

Low flow cut-off point

True cut-off point

High flow cut-off point

Dosage masking time

Total dosage time

Switch to low flow Restart weight monitoring

Time

Stop dosage

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure for threshold checks.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the weighing module.

If necessary, check the Active box to activate the Threshold Check function.

All parameters change from gray to black.

Click on the buttons corresponding to the detection direction ( Weighing ou

Downweighing ) and to the active phase 1 outputs ( S0 or S0 and S1 ).

Enter the Low flow and High flow cut-off points.

Select the LF masking time from the drop-down menu.

Confirm reconfiguration if necessary.

320

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Weighing programming

16

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the principles of programming a weighing application and all of the associated language objects.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

16.1

16.2

16.3

16.4

16.5

Topic

General on the weighing programming

Language objects for programmed exchange

Language objects for user-defined exchange

Description of the commands conveyed by program

Modifying the parameters by program

Page

322

329

333

340

351

321

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

16.1

General on the weighing programming

At a glance

The subject of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the general principles of programming a weighing application.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Principle of programming a weighing application

Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function

Presymbolization

Page

323

324

325

327

322

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Principle of programming a weighing application

General

Access to the measurements

Dynamic modification of the parameters

Once configured, the weighing module with sensors and associated with a TSX XBT

Y100 display panel can function autonomously (without a program). These outputs can be controlled without the intervention of the PLC processor’s program.

Programming the PLC processor supports: l Making available weighing information in order to carry out other processes or to guide other control units, l Dynamic modification of the weighing function’s parameters via explicit commands.

The numerical values, measurement of weight (GROSS or NET) and the flow are arranged into 2 double input register words (%ID). They are completed by 1 measurement Status word (%IW), 1 double tare value word (%ID) and 1 double shift register memory word (offsetting the zero) (%ID).

The following table lists the numerical weighing values conveyed by the weighing function.

Register address Meaning of the register

%IDxy.0.0

Weight value (GROSS or NET)

%IDxy.0.2

%IWxy.0.4

Flow

Measurement status: stability, zero…

%IDxy.0.5

%IDxy.0.7

Tare value

Shift register memory (offsetting the zero)

This data is automatically sent back to the processing unit at the beginning of the task associated with the channel, whether the task is in Run or in Stop. The data is directly accessible: l via a dialog operator in the application (access to the image objects in the PLC’s memory), l via the terminal by using the animation tables.

The adjustment parameters entered in configuration can be automatically modified during the course of the program via the WRITE_PARAM explicit exchange instruction.

Example : modification of the S0 large flow and S0 small flow cut-off points.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

323

Programming

Addressing Language Objects Associated with the Weighing Module

At a Glance

Illustration

Bit and words object addressing is defined in the Common Applications (See Manual

Premium PLC applications volume 1) part.

This page introduces specifics linked to weighing modules.

Reminder of addressing principle:

% I, Q, M, K X, W, D, F

Symbol Type of Object Format

X

Rack

Y

Position i r

Channel No. Rank

Specific values The table below gives the values that are specific to weighing module objects.

i

Element Values Comment x y

0 to 1

0 to 7

TSX/PCX 5710).

TSX/PCX 572•/3•/4•).

00 to 10 When the rack number (x) is not 0, the position (y) is coded on 2 digits:

00 to 10. Conversely, if the rack number (x) = 0, eliminate the non significant zeros (elimination from the left) from "y" ("x" does not appear and "y" is on 1 digit for values <10).

r

0 or MOD MOD: channel reserved for module management and parameters common to all channels.

0 to 16 or

ERR

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

324

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Description of the Main Objects Linked to the Weighing Function

Illustration

Sensors

Max range

Weight

The illustration presents the formation of the different functions executed by the module, and the associated language objects.

Measurement number %MWxy.0.14

%IDxy.0.5

%IDxy.0.2

Manual tare %MWxy.0.7

Tare Flow

%MWxy.0.6

Scaling

Filtering

F1

Adaptation to the process

Gross

Weight +

-

%IDxy.0.0

Net

Weight

Threshold monitoring

Signal

Metrological

Data

Stability criterion

Zero

Configuration

- Shift from source

%IDxy.0.7

%MDxy.0.8

%MDxy.0.10

Low flow

High flow

Weight

Direction

F1

F2

F3

%MWxy.0.12

%MWxy.0.13

%MWxy.0.15

%MWxy.0.16

Outputs

S0

S1

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

325

Programming

Description

Address

%IDxy.0.0

%IDxy.0.2

%IDxy.0.5

%IDxy.0.7

%MWxy.0.6

%MWxy.0.7

%MDxy.0.8

%MDxy.0.10

%MWxy.0.12

%MWxy.0.13

%MWxy.0.14

%MWxy.0.15

%MWxy.0.16

The following table describes the main language objects.

Role

Explicit

Explicit

Explicit

Explicit

Explicit

Explicit

Explicit

Type of object to exchange

Implicit

Implicit

Implicit

Implicit

Explicit

Explicit

Weight value (gross or net)

Flow

Tare value

Recalibration memory (zero offset)

F1 filter coefficient

Manual tare

S0 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

S1 low flow cut-off point (dosage)

Logic of outputs S0 and S1 (dosage)

LF mask time

Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate

F2 filter coefficient

F3 filter coefficient

326

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Presymbolization

Introduction

Syntax

The weighing application supports automatic symbolization of the language objects associated with the module.

These objects are symbolized with the following syntax:

PREFIXE_UTILISATEUR_SUFFIXE_CONSTRUCTEUR

The elements have the following characteristics and meanings:

Description Element Maximum number of characters

PREFIXE_UTILISATE

UR

12

SUFFIXE_CONSTRU

CTEUR

20 generic symbol given to the channel by the user part of the symbol corresponding to the channel’s bit or word object given by the system

Example

Note: As well as the symbol, a comment constructor is automatically generated.

This comment reiterates the object’s role.

This example is about a weighing module situated in slot 3 of the PLC’s tray.

If the generic symbol (PREFIXE_UTILISATEUR) given is MESURE , the following symbols are automatically generated.

Address Type

%ID3.0

DWORD

Symbol

MESURE_POIDS

%ID3.0.2

DWORD MESURE_DEBIT

%ID3.0.5

EBOOL MESURE_TARE

Comment

Weight value

Flow value

Tare value

%ID3.0.7

EBOOL MESURE_MEMOIRE_RECALAGE Reset memory value

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

327

Programming

Procedure The table below introduces the procedure

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Access the variables editor.

Access the I/O type variables.

Note: The channels whose objects can be symbolized have a letter P on the button on the left of the %CH address.

Double click on the P button of the channel to be symbolized.

Enter the user access code.

Note: If a symbol is already set by the channel, the suggested access code is the restored symbol, shortened to 12 characters.

Confirm with the Presymbolize button.

Deleting the presymbolization

Canceling the presymbolization supports, for any given logic channel, deletion of all or some of an object’s symbols.

Two options are available:

If the option chosen is…

Delete all presymbols

Then…

No prefix is chosen and all the symbols are deleted (including those that have been modified directly in the editor).

Delete the access-coded presymbols Only the objects that have an identical access code to the one entered are deleted.

328

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

16.2

Programming

Language objects for programmed exchange

At a glance

The subject of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes all the weighing module’s objects for programmed exchange.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function

Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing

Application

Page

330

331

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

329

Programming

Bit language objects for default exchange associated with the weighing function

At a glance

Bit objects

Address (1)

%Ixy.0.ERR

%Ixy.MOD.ERR

Caption:

(1)

These are the bit objects whose exchanges are done automatically in each task cycle in which the module channels are configured.

The table below introduces the different bit objects for user defined exchange.

Function

Channel bit error

Module bit error

Meaning when the bit is at state 1

Indicates that there is an error with the channel.

Indicates that there is an error with the module.

Note xy = module address. l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

With the weighing module, the channel and the module information levels are identical.

Validity conditions for the measurements and the module

The channel (or module) error bit is there to make sure that the numerical values are valid, so it is necessary to monitor this error bit.

Note: The error bit rises to 1 when an error condition appears on the channel

(underload/overload,…). To find out the details of the error, you have to monitor the channel status.

Performance of the error bits

According to the type and seriousness of the errors, the corresponding error bit can be transient (it goes back to 0 when the error disappears) or stored (it stays at 1 even if the error disappears). Only internal errors are stored type, the others are transient errors.

330

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Implicit Exchange Language Word Objects Associated with the Weighing

Application

At a Glance

Word objects

Address (1)

%IDxy.0.0

%IDxy.0.2

%IWxy.0.4

%IDxy.0.5

%IDxy.0.7

These are word objects whose exchanges are done automatically at each cycle of the task in which the module channels are configured.

The table below presents the different implicit exchange word objects.

Function

Double status word

Double status word

Status word

Double status word

Double status word

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Weight value (gross or net).

By default, if no taring command has been executed, the weight value is expressed as a GROSS weight. It changes to NET weight as soon as the taring command is executed or a tare has been manually introduced.

The measurement is expressed in legal format or high resolution according to the choice created at configuration.

Flow .

Example: %IDxy.0.2 = 450 000 signifies that, if the scale division is equal to

1.10

-2

kg, a weight difference of 45 kg has been measured between n measurements (sampling every 20 ms).

The n number of measurements is defined at configuration.

Information about the measured value (see details in following table).

Tare value .

This word allows the current tare value to be visualized in the same format as the weight. It is memorized by the module.

It is reset to 0 at each calibration.

Recalibration memory (zero offset)

This word allows the offset to be visualized currently in high resolution format. This value is memorized by the module. It is reset to 0 at each calibration.

Key:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

331

Programming

Measurement

Status Words

Address (1)

%IWxy.0.4:X0

%IWxy.0.4:X1

%IWxy.0.4:X2

%IWxy.0.4:X3

%IWxy.0.4:X4

%IWxy.0.4:X5

%IWxy.0.4:X6

%IWxy.0.4:X7

%IWxy.0.4:X8

%IWxy.0.4:X9

%IWxy.0.4:X10

%IWxy.0.4:X11

%IWxy.0.4:X12

%IWxy.0.4:X13

%IWxy.0.4:X14

%IWxy.0.4:X15

The table below describes the coding of the %IWxy.0.4 status word.

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Image of output S0.

Image of output S1.

Indicator that voltage is too low. The measurement is deviating. There is a strong possibility of an error on a sensor or in the wiring.

Voltage too high on module input.

Sealed module.

Processing in progress (Taring, Reset, etc.)

Calibration during processing.

Fault during command.

NET weight measurement.

Measurement instability.

This is set when the measurement is outside the stability range during the defined time. The extent of the stability range and the time are defined during configuration.

Zero indicator. This is set when the deviation from zero is not greater than +/- 1/4 of the scale division.

Zero tracking indicator active.

Predefined or manual tare indicator (language element specific to module, accessible in read only). This is set when the tare is not the result of a taring command but rather an entry by the user

Reserved.

Module in forced calibration.

Number of converter points.

Key:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

332

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

16.3

Programming

Language objects for user-defined exchange

At a glance

The subject of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes all the weighing module’s objects for user-defined exchange.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Explicit Exchange Objects

Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report

Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2

Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel

Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3

Page

334

336

337

338

339

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

333

Programming

Explicit Exchange Objects

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g.: default terminal block, missing module, etc.) and additional commands for advanced programming of applicationspecific functions.

Note: The configuration constants (See Reading the configuration parameters,

p. 357) %[email protected] (@module = module address), are read only and

correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the demand of the user program, using l l l l l l the following instructions:

READ_STS (read status words),

WRITE_CMD (write command words),

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

(write adjustment parameters),

(read adjustment parameters),

(save adjustment parameters),

RESTORE_PARAM (restoring adjustment parameters).

334

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Description

Programming

The table below provides the meaning of the different %MWxy.i.j

words.

Address (1)

%MWxy.MOD.2

%MWxy.0.0

%MWxy.0.1

%MWxy.0.2

%MWxy.0.3

%MDxy.0.4

%MWxy.0.6

%MWxy.0.7

%MDxy.0.8

%MDxy.0.10

%MWxy.0.12

%MWxy.0.13

%MWxy.0.14

%MWxy.0.15

%MWxy.0.16

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Module status

Exchange in progress

Exchange report

Instructions ensuring exchange

READ_STS

-

-

Channel status

Command order (See Explicit Exchange Object:

Command Word %MWxy.0.3, p. 339 )

(calibration, taring, setting to zero, etc.)

READ_STS

WRITE_CMD

Standard load weight for the calibration command

F1 filter coefficient

Manual tare value

S0 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

S1 high flow cut-off point (dosage)

Logic of S0 and S1 outputs

Low Flow mask time

Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate.

F2 filter coefficient

F3 filter coefficient

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

RESTORE_PARAM

Legend:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

335

Programming

Explicit Exchange Objects: Current Exchange and Report

Introduction to

"Current

Exchange" Word

This word type object with the address %MWxy.0.0

carries information about the current exchanges in the channel.

"Current

Exchange"

Description

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.0

word.

Address (1)

%MWxy.0.0:X0

%MWxy.0.0:X1

%MWxy.0.0:X2

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Current status parameter exchange.

Current command parameter exchange.

Current adjustment parameter exchange.

Legend:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

Introduction to the "Report"

Word

"Report" Word

Description

This word type object with the address %MWxy.0.1

carries information about the exchange reports in the channel.

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.1

word.

Address (1)

%MWxy.0.1:X0

%MWxy.0.1:X1

%MWxy.0.1:X2

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Status parameter exchange fault.

Command parameter exchange fault.

Adjust parameter exchange fault.

Legend:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

336

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Object for user-defined exchange: Module Status %MWxy.MOD.2

At a glance

Description

This word type object supplies information on the state of the module.

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.MOD.2

word.

Address (1)

%MWxy.MOD.2:X0

%MWxy.MOD.2:X1

%MWxy.MOD.2:X2

%MWxy.MOD.2:X3

%MWxy.MOD.2:X4

%MWxy.MOD.2:X5

%MWxy.MOD.2:X6

%MWxy.MOD.2:X7

Meaning (for the bit at state 1)

Internal error: Module is Out of Service.

Functional Error: communication or application error

Unused

Unused

Reserved

Configuration Error: the recognized module is not the one anticipated.

Default module is absent or switched off.

Unused

Caption:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

337

Programming

Explicit Exchange Object: %MWxy.0.2 status channel

At a Glance

Description

This word type object carries channel information about the status of channel 0.

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.2

word.

Address (1)

%MWxy.0.2:X0

%MWxy.0.2:X1

%MWxy.0.2:X2

%MWxy.0.2:X3

%MWxy.0.2:X4

%MWxy.0.2:X5

%MWxy.0.2:X6

%MWxy.0.2:X7

%MWxy.0.2:X8

%MWxy.0.2:X9

%MWxy.0.2:X10

%MWxy.0.2:X11

%MWxy.0.2:X12

%MWxy.0.2:X13

%MWxy.0.2:X14

%MWxy.0.2:X15

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

External error: Overload or underload during calibration

Range (2) overshoot fault or dynamics lower than 4.5mV at calibration

External error: saturation of the measurement circuit

External error: sealed module, configuration refused

Internal error: module failure

Configuration fault: the current module is not the one declared at configuration

Communication fault with the processor

Application fault

Protected module error, parameter refused: the module refuses the parameter if it influences the current value.

Non-calibrated module

Overload error

Underload error

Taring mode

Zero mode

Calibration mode

Forced calibration mode

Legend:

(1)

(2) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

This bit is activated as soon as the gross measured filtered weight value overshoots the overload threshold or is below the underload threshold. The 2 errors can be discriminated by the specific errors: underload error or overload error.

Note All internal fault detection on the module is conveyed by the position control of the discrete outputs to their fallback values (0 electric).

338

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Explicit Exchange Object: Command Word %MWxy.0.3

At a Glance

Description

This word type object allows weighing module commands to be sent by explicit exchange ( WRITE_CMD instruction).

The table below provides the meaning of the different bits of the %MWxy.0.3

word.

Address (1)

%MWxy.0.3:X0

%MWxy.0.3:X1

%MWxy.0.3:X2

%MWxy.0.3:X3

%MWxy.0.3:X4

%MWxy.0.3:X5

%MWxy.0.3:X6

%MWxy.0.3:X7

%MWxy.0.3:X8

%MWxy.0.3:X9

%MWxy.0.3:X10

%MWxy.0.3:X11

%MWxy.0.3:X12

%MWxy.0.3:X13

%MWxy.0.3:X14

%MWxy.0.3:X15

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

Save calibration coefficients in module.

Zero Load calibration.

Calibration Weight Calibration (Normal condition).

Cancellation of command (calibration, setting to zero, taring).

Taring order.

Reset order.

Return to GROSS weight order.

3 second display of manual tare.

Enable thresholds.

Disable thresholds.

Forced calibration (CPU -> Module).

Save calibration coefficients in processor.

Calibration weight calibration in degraded condition (Standard load < 70% of maximum weight).

Unused

Unused

Unused

Key:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

339

Programming

16.4

Description of the commands conveyed by program

At a glance

The subject of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the different commands that can be executed by program.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program

How to carry out the tare mode via the program

How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program

How to return to gross weight measurement via the program

How to display the manual tare via the program

How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program

Page

341

342

345

347

348

349

340

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Send Commands to Weighing Module by Program

General Sending commands to the module is done using the WRITE_CMD instruction with the following syntax: WRITE_CMD %CHxy.0

This instruction sends the order to the module and awaits its acknowledgement. This wait may require several task cycles.

Monitoring

Parameter

Recognition

Note: The module only interprets one command at a time. If a command is requested while the previous command is being processed, the new command is refused. There should never be more than one bit at 1 in the command word.

As the module may require several task cycles to recognize commands, two memory words are standardized to monitor the %MWxy.0.0 and %MWxy.0.1 exchanges

The first word %MWxy.0.0 indicates a current exchange.

The second word %MWxy.0.1 gives the exchange report.

The following table describes the objects used for monitoring the sending of commands to the module.

Address (1)

%MWxy.0.0:X1

%MWxy.0.1:X1

%MWxy.0.2:X7

Meaning (for the bit at status 1)

indicates that the command has been sent to the module.

specifies if the command is accepted by the module.

signals that a command or parameter has been refused (application fault).

Legend:

(1) xy = module address.

l l x for the rack number, y for the position in the rack.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

341

Programming

How to carry out the tare mode via the program

At a glance This function leads the value of the measured NET weight to zero when a load, or tare, is placed on the load holder.

It therefore supports movement of the measurement with an offset value, in order to make it conform to the user’s expected value.

When no tare mode operation has been carried out, the NET weight is the same as the GROSS weight.

Note: l When changing configuration, all tares are deleted. Any Tare mode execution cancels all tares input in manual mode and resets the "manual" tare indicator to l zero.

Also, an order to return to GROSS weight allows you to delete all tare modes. It does not need any acceptance condition.

Execution conditions for the tare mode l l l

The Tare mode command’s execution acceptance conditions are the following:

The measurement is stable.

The measurement is below the maximum range.

The measurement is strictly positive.

342

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a tare mode operation.

Step Action Performance of the module

1 Input the WRITE_CMD instruction while programming the tare mode order (%MWxy.0.3:X4 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN.

The module switches to tare mode and sends the

%IWxy.0.4:X5 = 1 TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS report.

Acquires the tare.

Note: The value of the weight is measured and stored in the associated %IDxy.0.5.It will be taken from all further GROSS weight measurements to determine the NET weight.

End of acquisition: TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS = 0

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State

TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS : %IWxy.0.4:X5

The module stays in the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS state for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met or until it receives an order to cancel the command.

Summary of the data used

The table below provides a table of the data used for a tare mode.

Type

Command

Display

Role

Tare mode order

Tare value

Tare mode in progress

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X4

%IDxy.0.5

%IWxy.0.4:X5

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

343

Programming

Example The following example in instruction list language describes a tare mode order being sent to the weighing module in slot 2, rack 0.

LD TRUE

S %MW 2.0.3:X4

[WRITE_CMD %CH2.0]

Executing the program involves:

2

3

Phase

1

4

Description

Sending the command.

Setting the %MW2.0.0:X1 bit to 1, showing that the command is being sent.

This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then goes back to

0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

The %MW2.0.1:X1 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange. The 0 value shows that the command has been accepted by the module.

Note:

%IW2.0.4:X5 stays at 1 (In progress) for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met (waiting for measurement stability, for example).

The status channel’s application fault bit is at 1 (module executing command). As for all commands, the order can be cancelled by sending the "cancel command in progress" command.

344

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

How to set to zero the value of the weight by the program

At a glance This function leads the value of the measured weight to zero. The zero flag is therefore set.

It is controlled via the Set to Zero command bit. The correction carried out on the measurement is stored in the %IDxy.0.7 word, in high format resolution. It can be saved by the application. This parameter is reset to zero on each calibration.

Note: When changing configuration, all settings to zero are deleted.

Execution conditions for setting to zero l l l

The set to zero command’s execution acceptance conditions are the following:

The measurement is in GROSS weight.

The measurement is stable.

The measurement is included in the zero format’s print range, as set in configuration.

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a set to zero :

Step Action Performance of the module

1 Input WRITE_CMD while programming the Set to zero order (%MWxy.0.3:X5 = 1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN.

The module switches to MISE_A_ZERO mode and sends the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS report.

%IWxy.0.4:X5 = 1.

The module proceeds to acquire the measurement and stores the new value in the %IDxy.0.7 shift register memory.

TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS = 0 shows the end of the procedure.

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State

TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS : %IWxy.0.4:X5

The module stays in the TRAITEMENT_EN_COURS state for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met or until it receives an order to cancel the command.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

345

Programming

Summary of the data used

The table below provides the data used for resetting to zero.

Type

Command

Display

Report

Role

Setting to 0 order

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X5

Shift register memory %IDxy.0.7

In progress %IWxy.0.4:X5

Example The following example in instruction list language describes a MISE_A_ZERO order being sent to the weighing module in slot 2, rack 0.

LD TRUE

S %MW 2.0.3:X5

[WRITE_CMD %CH2.0]

Executing this order involves:

2

3

Phase

1

4

Description

Sending the command.

Setting the %MW2.0.0:X1 bit to 1, showing that the command is being sent.

This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then goes back to

0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

The %MW2.0.1:X1 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange.The 0 value shows that the command has been accepted by the module.

Note:

%IW2.0.4:X5 stays at 1 (In progress) for as long as the acceptance conditions are not met (waiting for measurement stability, for example).

The status channel’s application fault bit is at 1 (module executing command).

As for all commands, the order can be cancelled by sending the cancel command in progress command.

346

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

How to return to gross weight measurement via the program

At a glance This function cancels the value of the tare so that the value of the current weight is in gross weight.

The current weight is stored in the %IDxy.0.0 word, in the format set in configuration.

This command does not require any particular execution conditions.

Execution conditions for the tare mode

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for executing a return to measurement in gross weight.

Step Action Performance of the module

1 Input the WRITE_CMD while programming the return to measurement in gross weight (%MWxy.0.3:X6 =

1).

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN. The module switches to "return to gross weight" mode.

The module then sets the tare to zero.

3 Monitoring the command’s smooth execution: State of the NET flag: %IWxy.0.4:X8

-

The NET = 0 (%IWxy.0.4:X8=0) flag shows the end of the procedure.

Summary of the data used

The table below provides the data used for resetting to zero.

Type

Command

Display

Report

Role

Return to gross weight order

Measured weight

Value of the Tare in progress

In progress

Gross weight

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X6

%IDxy.0.0

%IDxy.0.5

%IWxy.0.4:X5

%IWxy.0.4:X8 = 0

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

347

Programming

How to display the manual tare via the program

At a glance

Execution conditions for the tare mode

This function supports display of the manual tare on the display panel for 3 seconds.

For this command, a manual tare must have already been configured.

Procedure The following table describes the procedure for displaying the manual tare.

Step Action

1 Input WRITE_CMD while programming the display order (%MWxy.0.3:X7 = 1).

Performance of the module

-

2 Confirm the execution, with the application in RUN.

The module manages its data normally.The values displayed on the TSX XBT H100 display panel show the manual tare’s value.

3 After the 3 second delay, the display panel reverts to its current values.

-

Summary of the data used

The table below provides the data used for resetting to zero.

Type

Command

Display

Role

Tare display order

Manual tare

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X7

The data on the display panel show the manual tare.

348

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

How to Enable or Disable Thresholds by Program

At a Glance

Operating

Principle

Enabling

Procedure

These functions are primarily used to coordinate the output command with the processor-managed mechanism.

The threshold check option must first be enabled in the configuration screen.

Action on outputs is performed from the: Enable thresholds command. Once this command has been executed, the threshold check cycle starts.

A disable command lets you to stop the threshold check cycle in progress and authorize a new threshold enabling command.

If need be, this command will also reset outputs S0and S1 to 0.

The following table describes the procedure for enabling thresholds.

Step Action Module behavior

1 Make the necessary changes to the threshold values, output logic and mask time.

-

2 Position the threshold enabling order

(%MWxy.0.3:X8 = 1).

-

3 Launch threshold enabling using the

WRITE_CMD instruction.

The module interprets the request, sets the

S0 and S1 outputs and ensures the conformity of the image bits: l l

%IWxy.0.4: Current X0 position of S0.

%IWxy.0.4: Current X1 position of S1.

Disabling

Procedure

The following table describes the procedure for disabling thresholds.

Step Action

1 Position the threshold disabling order (%MWxy.0.3:X9 = 1).

Module behavior

-

2 Launch threshold disabling using the

WRITE_CMD instruction.

The module sets outputs to idle and image bits to 0.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

349

Programming

Summary of Data

Used

The table below provides the data used for enabling and disabling thresholds.

Type

Command

Display

Role

Threshold enabling order

Threshold disabling order

Current flow

High flow threshold

Low flow threshold

Output logic

PD mask time

S0 current position

S1 current position

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X8

%MWxy.0.3:X9

%IDxy.0.2

%MDxy.0.8

%MDxy.0.10

%MWxy.0.12

%MWxy.0.13

%IWxy.0.4:X0

%IWxy.0.4:X1

350

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

16.5

Modifying the parameters by program

At a glance

The subject of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes how to dynamically modify the application’s parameters by program.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Modify Parameters by Program

PL7 instructions used for adjustments

Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program

Reading the configuration parameters

Page

352

354

356

357

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

351

Programming

Modify Parameters by Program

Principle

List of

Adjustable

Parameters

You can command the modification of certain parameters by program, in order to automatically adapt the measurements to the processing applications.

Example: modifying the tare value by program if several types of product are to be weighed with different conditioning.

The following parameters may be modified by program:

Adjustable parameters

F1 filter coefficient

"Manual" tare value

Cut-off points (thresholds)

Logic of S0 and S1 outputs

LF mask time

Number of measurements used to calculate flow rate

F2 filter coefficient

F3 filter coefficient

Corresponding data

%MWxy.0.6

%MWxy.0.7

%MDxy.0.8 and %MDxy.0.10

%MWxy.0.12

%MWxy.0.13

%MWxy.0.14

%MWxy.0.15

%MWxy.0.16

Possible Actions You can: l l l l

Modify an adjustment parameter by program,

Send adjustment parameters to the module,

Control the module's parameter recognition,

Read the adjustment parameter value in the module and thereby update the PLC l l memory,

Save the adjustment parameters,

Restore the value of saved parameters to the PLC memory.

352

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Instructions

Used

Programming

The instructions used to do these operations are as follows:

Instruction

WRITE_PARAM %CH xy.0

READ_PARAM %CH xy.0

Function carried out

Send the parameter contents of the previous table to the weighing module.

Reads the adjustment parameters in the module and updates the previously cited table.

SAVE_PARAM %CH xy.0

Saves the adjustment parameter values in the memory zone of the processor. These parameter values will be the ones used when the PLC is started from cold.

RESTORE_PARAM %CH xy.0

Allows the adjustment parameters to be reloaded with the values entered at module configuration or at the last

SAVE_PARAM .

The module can process several adjustments simultaneously.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

353

Programming

PL7 instructions used for adjustments

General

Send the adjustment parameters to the module

To be able to carry out adjustment operations, you must be able to access the module’s own data.

This is done by using the following instructions.

Sending the parameters from the module’s channel is done by using the

WRITE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

WRITE_PARAM %CH xy.0

This instruction sends the contents of the parameters to the module and waits for its acknowledgement. This can take several task cycles.

Monitoring the acknowledgeme nt of the parameters

As the module can take several task cycles to acknowledge values, two memory l l l words are used to monitor the exchanges: %MWxy.0.0

and %MWxy.0.1

The first word %MWxy.0.0

shows that there is an exchange in progress,

The second word %MWxy.0.1

gives the report on the exchange,

The bits in position 2 are associated to the adjustment parameters: l The %MWxy.0.0:X2 bit shows that the adjustment parameters are sent to the module, l The %MWxy.0.1:X2 bit specifies whether the adjustment parameters are accepted by the module.

Example l l

Writing the module’s parameters in slot 2 of rack 0,

WRITE_PARAM %CH2.0

involves:

Sending the adjustment parameters,

Setting the %MW2.0.0:X2 bit to 1, showing that the adjustment parameters are being sent. This bit remains at 1 until the module sends a report. The bit then l goes back to 0. The exchange report bit is then relevant.

The %MW2.0.1:X2 exchange report bit rises to 1 if there is a problem during the exchange. The 0 value shows that the data has been accepted by the module.

354

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Reading the adjustment parameters

Saving the adjustment parameters

Restoring the saved adjustment parameters

Programming

The READ_PARAM instruction supports reading the module’s adjustment parameters and updating the PLC’s memory. It is particularly useful after a WRITE_PARAM that the module has not accepted. Reading the adjustment parameters can take several task cycles.

Reading the adjustment parameters from the module’s channel is done by using the

READ_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

READ_PARAM %CH xy.0

The SAVE_PARAM instruction allows you to copy the current values of the module’s adjustment parameters in the backup zone, set in the processor’s memory. The backup zone is not accessible from the language.

This instruction can take several task cycles to be executed. Saving the module’s adjustment parameters is done by using the SAVE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

SAVE_PARAM %CH xy.0

The RESTORE_PARAM instruction supports restoring of the saved adjustment parameter values in the processor’s memory and in the module.

Restoring the adjustment parameters from the module is done by using the

RESTORE_PARAM instruction, with the following syntax:

RESTORE_PARAM %CH xy.0

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

355

Programming

Description of Parameters Adjustable by Program

Description The following table describes the parameters that can be adjusted by program, using the WRITE_PARAM instruction.

Word

%MWxy.0.6

%MWxy.0.15

%MWxy.0.16

Role

Filter Coefficients

Description

The admissible filter coefficient values are between 0 and 19.

%MWxy.0.7

%MD xy.0.8

%MD xy.0.10

%MWxy.0.12

"Manual" tare value The admissible "manual" tare values are between 0 and 65535. They cannot exceed the maximum range.

Cut-off points

(thresholds)

Output logic

S0 high flow cut-off point

S1 low flow cut-off point

The threshold values allowed lie between 0 and the maximum weight in high resolution format..

If a threshold check has not been defined at configuration, no detection processing is done. The value of these threshold is zero by default.

Note: l l

When weighing, HF < LF < Maximum weight

In downweighing: LF < HF < Maximum weight

The module carries out a coherence check of the threshold values. If this logic is not respected, the thresholds will be refused.

l l

%MWxy.0.12:X0 l l

0: Weighing

1: Downweighing l l

%MWxy.0.12:X1

0: S0 then S1

1: S0 then S1 then S1

%MWxy.0.13

LF mask time

%MWxy.0.14

Number of measurement for flow

Admissible values are between 0 and 15 per 1/10 of a second step (0 = 0s, 1= 0.1s, 2 = 0.2s, etc.).

Admissible values are values 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 or 64.

356

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Reading the configuration parameters

General All of the parameters entered during the module’s configuration can be accessed by program in read only.

These parameters are coded in 3 words from the %KW constant zone.

Coding the maximum range

Reading the maximum range, which is configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.0 word.

Coding the measurement unit

Reading the unit and the grade, which are configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.1 word.

The measurement unit is coded on 3 bits of the least significant byte.

%KWxy.0.1:least significant bit bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

The following table describes the coding for the unit of measurement.

3

4

5

1

2

Bits 0 to 2

0

Corresponding unit g t kg lb oz

<none>

Role gram kilogram ton (metric) pound (= 453g) ounce (= 28.35g) no unit

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

357

Programming

Coding the grade Reading the unit and the grade, which are configured for measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.1 word.

Note: The grade is still set in the same unit as the measurement

The grade is coded on 5 bits of the most significant byte. most significant bit %KWxy.0.1

bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8

The following table describes the coding for the grade.

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

1

2

Bits 8 to 12 Corresponding unit

0 0.001

0.002

0.005

0.01

0.02

0.05

0.1

1

2

0.2

0.5

18

19

20

14

15

16

17

Bits 8 to 12 Role

11 5

12

13

10

20

50

100

200

500

1000

2000

5000

358

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Programming

Coding the stability, the zero, the thresholds, the outputs and the format

Reading the format print range and the stability time as well as the zero format print range, the zero follower’s activity, the overload threshold, the use of outputs and the weight value formats, configured for the measurement channel, can be accessed via the %KWxy.0.2 memory word.

Coding of the %KWxy.0.2 word.

%KWxy.0.2:least significant bit bit 7 bit 6 bit 5

Stability time bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1

Stability print range bit 0 most significant bit %KWxy.0.2

bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10

Format Outputs Zero follower

Manual tare

Print range

Zero

Sensor supply bit 9 bit 8 overload

The following table describes the stability print range’s coding (bits 0 to 2).

3

4

1

2

Value read Equivalence in grade

0 2

3

4

6

8

The following table describes the stability time’s coding (bits 4 to 5).

1

2

Value read Equivalence in seconds

0 0.4

3

0.5

0.7

1

The following table describes the overload’s coding (bits 8 to 9).

1

2

Value read Type of overload selected

0 Maximum range + 9 grades

Maximum range + 2% of the maximum range

Maximum range + 5% of the maximum range

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

359

Programming

The following table describes the coding for the other parameters. These parameters are all coded on a %KWxy.0.2 word bit.

bit at 0 bit at 1 Bit number

11

Parameter

Recalibration range

12

13

14

15

Predetermined tare

Activity of the zero follower

Using the outputs

Format

+/-2% of the maximum range

No predetermined tare

Inactive

+/-5% of the maximum range

Predetermined tare

Active

Not used

Legal (fixed point physical unit)

Used

High resolution (100th of a fixed point physical unit)

360

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Calibrating the measurement string

17

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes how to calibrate the measurement string.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the Calibration Function

Description of the Calibration Screen

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program

How to Achieve Forced Calibration

Performing a Forced Calibration by Program

Page

362

364

365

367

369

370

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

361

Calibration

Introduction to the Calibration Function

General The calibration of the analog measurement system consists in making a weight value correspond to an electrical signal transmitted by sensors.

This adaptation is made on site when the product is set up. It is necessary to ensure the measurement's validity.

Note: The calibration function, forced or not, is only accessible in offline mode with the PLC in Run.

Calibration rules Any non-calibrated module is in channel fault (can be seen in the debug screen or on the module, by the flashing of channel 0).

The first calibration must be complete:

1.

Zero Load

2.

Standard Load

3.

Save otherwise the information returned means nothing.

Calibration cannot be performed if the PLC processor has a Flash-Eprom memory card (TSX MFP 032P or TSX MFP 064P or TSX MFP 0128P).

Calibration can be redone throughout the module's life. The electronics characteristics do not require regular recalibration. However, legal constraints or the application's mechanical characteristics may require calibration, particularly for commercial transactions.

Note: Calibration is independent of the configured filter, but takes into account

Metrological and Stability Information parameters.

362

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Calibration

Calibration Type You can choose one of the following 3 calibration types: l normal calibration (The calibration function must be performed with a standard l load weight that is greater than or equal to 70% of the maximum weight), graded calibration (If for various reasons calibration cannot performed under the conditions previously described), l forced calibration: l CPU -> Module: Being able to restore adjustments made to a different module in the event of a maintenance concern or duplication l Module -> CPU: Being able to make the processor parameters conform with the parameters of a calibrated module that is connected to a new slot.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

363

Calibration

Description of the Calibration Screen

At a Glance

Illustration

The calibration screen gives access to calibration commands.

This screen can be only accessed in offline mode.

1

2

TSX ISP Y101 [RACK 0 POSITION 3]

Calibration

Designation: 1I. WEIGHING 3 FILTERS

RUN ERR IO

3

4

Symbol:

Channel:

0

Function:

Weighing

Weight

Value: 137.66

Kg

NET

Task:

MAST

Calibration

Zero load

Standard

Load 130.00

Cancel Save

Kg

Forced Calibration

CPU --> Module

Module --> CPU

Cancel

DIAG...

DIAG...

General

Description

Element Addre ss

1

2

3

4

The table below shows the different elements of the calibration screen and their functions.

Function

Title bar Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position and the rack number.

Module zone Allows selection of screen type, access to the adjustment part of the screen, and to diagnostic functions.

Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View

→

Module Zone command.

Visualization zone

Gives access to the weighing information visualization (See Description of the weighing

debug screen’s display zone, p. 376

).

Calibration zone

Gives access to calibration commands (See Calibrating the Analog Measurement System,

p. 365 ).

364

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Calibration

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System

At a Glance Calibrating can be done on a PL7 station connected to the PLC using the calibration screen.

It can also be done using an operator dialog, which uses PL7 language instructions.

Note: The procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing Cancel . The module reverts to the previous parameters. The current calibration parameters are therefore lost.

The procedure is only enabled if the module has been calibrated correctly.

If there is a measurement saturation problem, the new parameters cannot be saved.

Either the error must be corrected or the procedure be cancelled, using Cancel .

Procedure This table describes the procedure for calibrating the analog measurement system.

Step

1

Action

Switch the rack on.

2 Access the calibration screen:

1.

select Tools

→

Configuration

2.

click on the module's slot

3.

select Calibration from the drop-down menu

Note: the processor must be in RUN and the terminal in offline mode.

3 Check that the counter output is empty.

4 Click the Zero Load button to carry out zero load calibration (recognized by the load receiver).

5 Place calibration weight.

Result

The product is initialized, carries out self-tests and receives its configuration.

-

-

This phase requires around 20 seconds.

The Zero Load button switches to reverse image during this phase and an hour glass appears.

The module switches to channel fault and all measurements are invalid.

The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6

Calibration_in_progress changes. The module indicates the acquisition of the zero weight reference and processes the reports.

-

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

365

Calibration

Step Action Result

6 Enter the calibration weight value in the "Standard

Load" field (this value is equal to the maximum weight) and click on the Standard Load button.

If the command is disabled, an error message indicates the type of problem encountered.

This phase requires around 20 seconds.

The module checks the standard load weight against the maximum weight.

The status of the indicator %IWxy.0.4:X6

Calibration_in_progress changes.

The module acquires the standard load weight reference, processes and positions the report.

7 Click the Save button to recognize the parameters resulting from calibration.

The module and the processor recognize and save the parameters resulting from calibration.

During the write phase, the measurement remains in channel fault. This fault disappears as soon as writing is finished (current channels faults and calibration in progress disappear). The measurement is valid.

366

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Calibration

Calibrating the Analog Measurement System by Program

General

Procedure

Several language elements are used to implement and supervise the calibration mechanism.

The calibration screen facilitates the procedure, but it can also be performed by program using reserved data.

Program the following operations to perform a calibration by program.

Step Action

1 Zero weight Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the calibration order of the channel using the zero weight

(%MWxy.0.3:X1=1).

Result

The status of the indicator

%IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration in progress changes.

This operation enables you to determine the Offset parameter.

2 Standard

Load

3

Load the standard load weight value in the %MDxy.0.4 word

-

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the calibration order of the channel using the standard load weight

(%MWxy.0.3:X2=1, or

%MWxy.0.3:X12=1 for a graded calibration).

4 Save the parameters in the module

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order of the calibration in the module (%MWxy.0.3:X0=1).

-

5 Copy the module parameters in the CPU

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order in the processor

(%MWxy.0.3:X11=1).

The status of the indicator

%IWxy.0.4:X6 Calibration in progress changes.

This operation enables you to determine the Gain parameter.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

367

Calibration

Summary of Data

Used

The table below shows the data involved in a calibration.

Type

Command type

Role

Save calibration in the module

Zero weight

Standard load weight (Normal)

Associated data

%MWxy.0.3:X0

%MWxy.0.3:X1

%MWxy.0.3:X2

Forced calibration(CPU -> Module) %MWxy.0.3:X10

Save calibration in the processor %MWxy.0.3:X11

Standard load weight (Graded)

Value of standard load weight

%MWxy.0.3:X12

%MDxy.0.4

Command parameter

Report Calibration in progress (Normal)

Instability

Overload or underload during calibration

Non-calibrated module

Calibration mode

Forced calibration mode

%IWxy.0.4:X6

%IWxy.0.4:X9

%%MWxy.0.2:X0

%MWxy.0.2:X9

%MWxy.0.2:X14

%MWxy.0.2:X15

368

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Calibration

How to Achieve Forced Calibration

At a Glance This function responds to the needs of speedy maintenance.

Forced calibration allows calibration values from a weighing module to be transferred to the central unit, and vice versa.

Note: This action cannot be reversed. Once the transfer has occurred, it is not possible to cancel the command.

Note: This function is only accessible in offline mode, with the PLC in Run.

Operating Mode

Procedure

Transferring the CPU to the weighing module is always authorized once the CPU has the requisite calibration parameters for the desired slot.

Transferring the weighing module to the central unit requires the module to be calibrated (not forced calibration).

This table describes the procedure for achieving forced calibration.

Step

1

2

3

Action

Switch the rack on.

Access the calibration screen:

1.

Select Tools

→

Configuration

2.

Click on the module's slot

3.

Select Calibration from the drop-down menu

In the Forced Calibration field, click either CPU -->Module or CPU -->Module , according to the desired transfer direction.

Note: The procedure is not enabled unless the transfer is done correctly. If there is a problem, click the Cancel button in the Forced Calibration field.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

369

Calibration

Performing a Forced Calibration by Program

General

Procedure

Several language elements are used to implement and supervise the calibration mechanism.

The calibration screen facilitates the procedure, but it can also be performed by program using reserved data.

Carry out the following operations to perform a forced calibration by program.

Direction of copy

CPU ->

Module

Action

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order of the calibration in the module

(%MWxy.0.3:X10=1).

Module ->

CPU

Enter WRITE_CMD while positioning the save order in the processor (%MWxy.0.3:X11=1)

Result

This operation is used for example when replacing a module. It enables you to automatically restore the calibration parameters in the module (gain, offset and converter configuration.

This operation enables you to automatically restore the calibration parameters in the processor when, for example, you are using a module that is placed in a new slot.

This operation is only possible if the module is calibrated.

370

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging the weighing function

18

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the debugging screen and describes the functions available for debugging the application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen

Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone

Page

372

374

376

377

371

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Description of the Debugging Screen for the Dedicated Weighing Function

At a Glance

Illustration

The debugging screen allows access to the display of weighing information and access to the adjustment of certain parameters.

This screen can be only accessed in offline mode.

1

2

TSX ISP Y101 [RACK 0 POSITION 3]

Debug Adjustment

Designation: 1I. WEIGHING 3 FILTERS

RUN ERR IO

3

4

DIAG...

Symbol:

Channel:

0

Function:

Weighing

Task:

MAST

DIAG...

Weight

No. Converter Points

Value: 100.63

Kg

NET

Outputs

0

S0

1 0

S1

1

Measurement Information

Flow: 0.0000

Zero Tracking

Threshold Check

Activate

LF Mask Time:

Direction:

Kg

Deactivate

0

Tare Value:

Zero Memory:

Flow

Calculate on s

4

Tare

Predefined

Value:

Weighing Downweighing

Cut-off points

0.00

0.0000

0.1

Kg

Kg measurements

Kg

Filtering

F1:

LF

HF

4

KG

F1

F2

Active Outputs Phase 1:

S0 S0 and S1

Low Flow (LF)

High Flow (HF)

0.0000

0.0000

Kg

Kg

F2: 0 F3:

F3

0

T

372

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Description The table below shows the different elements of the debugging screen and their functions.

3

4

Address

1

2

Element

Title bar

Function

Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position and the rack number.

Module zone Allows selection of screen type, access to the adjustment part of the screen, and to diagnostic functions.

Displaying this zone is optional. Choose using the View

→

Module Zone command.

Display zone Gives access to the weighing information display.

Adjustment zone

Gives access to adjustment of the module's parameters.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

373

Debugging

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen

At a glance

Illustration

This zone displays general information on the state of the module or the channel.

This zone on the screen informs you about the state of the module.

Debugging Adjustments

Designation: 1I. WEIGHING 3 FILTERS

RUN ERR

Symbol:

Channel:

0

Function:

Weighing

Task:

MAST

IO DIAG...

DIAG...

Description

374

The following table describes the different elements of the module screen zone and channel state.

Address

Debugging

Adjustment

Description

Drop-down list of choices of operating modes

Check box supporting access to the adjustment functions. When this box is ticked, an extra zone is added to the debugging screen giving access to the parameters.

Indicates whether the module is closed (locked padlock) or not.

ou

RUN

ERR

I/O

DIAG

Indicator lit: normal operation

Indicator unlit: module error or switched off

Indicator lit: internal error, module broken down

Indicator blinking: communication error, absent, invalid or faulty application

Indicator unlit: no error

Indicator lit: External error: l l l l overload or underload error during calibration, range overshoot error, measurement error

Closed module: configuration refused

Indicator blinking:loss of communication with the processor

Indicator unlit: no error

This light goes red when there is a module level error. The details about the error are accessible via the DIAG button below.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Address

Channel

Function

Task

DIAG

Debugging

Description

Equal to zero, the module only has one channel, which is the 0 channel.

Weighing

Recalls the task in which the module is configured

This light goes red when there is an error linked to the weighing function. The details about the error are accessible via the DIAG button below.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

375

Debugging

Description of the weighing debug screen’s display zone

illustration This zone is the dynamic display zone containing important information connected to weighing.

Weight

No. Converter Points

Value: 100.63

Kg

Measurement Information

Flow:

0.0000

Zero Tracking

Kg

NET

Tare Value:

Zero Memory:

Outputs

0

S0

1 0

S1

1

0.00

0.0000

Kg

Kg

Description

Zone Field

Weight Nb Converter

Pulses

Value

NET

The following table describes the different elements belonging to the weighing debugging screen’s display zone.

Description

By default, the screen displays the current weight value. Click on the key No. Converter

Points will allow you to switch to points mode during the next disconnection of PLC.

The display weight will be reapplied when the PLC next runs.

The current weight value in a defined unit. If there is a default on the measurement circuit detected by the module or during its calibration mode, the ERR indicator will be displayed on the screen.

The NET weight indicator is positioned if the module returns NET weight information, otherwise this relates to GROSS weight.

The "stable measurement" indicator specifies that the measurement is in the defined stability range.

The zero zone indicator is activated when the measured weight is in zero format (+/- 1/

4 of the scale indicator).

Outputs The supplied indications correspond to the physical output states S0 and S1.

Measurement Information This zone displays: l l l l the flow value, it is indicated by the unit measurement, the current tare value, the memory zero value corresponds to zero shift from the last calibration, the PT indicator specifies the tare value which has been manually introduced and not measured, l the Zero indicator shows that the function has been parameterized.

376

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Debugging

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone

Illustration This zone allows you to modify the adjustment parameters.

Filtering

F1: 4

Threshold Check

Activate

LF Mask Time:

Direction:

Weighing

Deactivate

0

Downweighing

Active Outputs Phase 1:

S0 S0 and S1 s:

Flow

Calculate on 4

Tare

Predefined

Value:

Cut-off points

Low Flow (LF)

High Flow (HF)

0.1

measurements

0.0000

0.0000

Kg

Kg

Kg F2: 0

KG

LF

HF

F1

F2

F3

F3: 0

T

Description It gives access to the modification and display of the following parameters:

Address

Filtering (See How to

Modify Measurement

Input Filtering, p. 314

)

PD mask time

Weighing/Unweighing direction

Phase 1 active outputs

Low flow (PD) and high flow (GD) cut off points

Description

You have the possibility to modify for each phase the filter coefficient value of the measurement input.

You can choose a value from 0 to 19.

Note: The stronger the filter (value from 1 to 11), the longer the response time.

You have the possibility to modify the number of measurements for the flow calculation.

The listed choices carry the values 2, 4, 8 16, 32 and 64.

Flow (See How to Modify the Flow Calculation,

p. 316

)

Tare (See How to Modify

the Tare, p. 317 )

You have the possibility to introduce a predetermined tare by checking the corresponding box and filling in this tare value in the defined unit.

Threshold check (See

How to Modify the Flow Calculation, p. 316 ): These parameters are only displayed if, during

configuration, the "Threshold check" option has been activated. Recognition of all parameters is effected from the confirmation command in the Edit menu.

Activate

Deactivate

This key activates the threshold check monitoring cycle.

This key deactivates the threshold check monitoring cycle and positions outputs S0 and

S1 into fallback mode.

Lets the user modify the mask time during switch to low flow.

Lets you modify the threshold recognition.

Lets you choose the active outputs during the first dosage phase.

Lets you modify the threshold values.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

377

Debugging

378

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Protecting the adjustments

19

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes how to protect the adjustments done during the previous phases.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters

How to protect the adjustments

Legal metrology and regulations

Page

380

382

383

379

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Protecting the adjustments

Protection of the Adjustments to Weighing Parameters

General Any weighing instrument which can be used for commercial transactions must be approved. The parameters associated with the measurement must therefore be protected. It should not be possible to introduce into an instrument, via the interface, instructions or data likely to: l l falsify the weighing results displayed, change an adjustment factor.

Note: Protection by sealing aims to guarantee measurement conformity, so that the parameters accessible only apply to the exploitation aspects of the module information by the mechanism.

380

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Protecting the adjustments

Effect of

Protecting the

Configuration

Parameters

Consequences of Protection

There are two types of information. Information, which can be protected (if a module is sealed, this type of information will be available in read only) and information with free access (Read and Write)

The table below identifies the characteristics of this information according to the protection put in place.

Functions

Task

Flow/ Calculation on n measurements

Tare/ Predefined

Threshold checking/ Active

Threshold checking/ Direction

Threshold checking/ Active outputs

Threshold Checking/ Cut-off points

Threshold checking/ LV Mask Time

Unit

Max Range (MR)

Scale Division

Overload Threshold

Filtering/ Coefficient

Data format

Stability/ Extent of Range

Stability/ Time

Zero/ Zero tracking

Zero/ Recalibration range

Without sealing

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

With sealing

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

Non modifiable

The information word %IWxy.0.4:X4 (to 1) tells you if the measurement is protected. l l l

A sealed module that receives a different configuration to the one memorized

(before being switched off prior to the movement of the rider) is refused.

In this case the module is seen as missing in the PLC diagnostics, but sends a weight to the display.

A sealed module will not accept a new calibration request

Note: Using the file lets you keep a paper record for the configuration

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

381

Protecting the adjustments

How to protect the adjustments

Necessary conditions

Illustration

The calibration and adjustment operations must be completed.

The following illustration shows how to position the riders in order to protect the adjustments.

Display block

Backpanel connector

1

2

3

Procedure The following table describes the operation of protecting the adjustments (leading).

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Action

Take the module out of the PLC rack (the rack can remain switched on).

Remove the module’s casing (use a TORX type screwdriver for this).

Place the rider in position 2-3 as shown in the illustration.

Put the module back into its casing.

Replace the module in the rack in its previous position.

382

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Protecting the adjustments

Legal metrology and regulations

EU approval The set consisting of: load holder + sensors + module can be considered as an

IPFNA (non automatic weighing instrument).

As such, and to be able to use it for commercial transitions, it has been approved by the EU.

If it is only used for internal processes, the displayt must have an identification plate mentioning:

Trademark

Type of instrument

Serial number

‘All transitions prohibited’

Max = e =

If it is used for regulated uses (e.g. commercial transitions), the display must have a identification plate, showing:

Trademark

Type of instrument

Serial Number

Max =

Min = e=

Number and date of EU approval of typeNumber 97.00.620.016.0

29th September 1997

Moreover, it must receive a first check on leaving the factory, as well as regular onsite monitoring by a licensed body. Generally, monitoring takes place once a year, and this is the responsibility of the owner.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

383

Protecting the adjustments

Approval of the model

Measurement and control device for filling machine and a discontinuous counter

This IPFNA can be supplemented by the specific software applications ‘Filling

Machine’ or ‘Discontinuous counter’. As such, it has passed national approvals, as a measurement and automatic control device for filling machines and discontinuous counters.

It is therefore up to the manufacturer of the measurer or discontinuous counter to get a complete approval of any automatic weighing instruments made up in this way, in the most straightforward conditions possible.

It is also up to the manufacturer of the machine to install the identification plate and to present the machine for its first check, when necessary.

Approval of a continuous counter model

Associated with a weighing table, it is authorized as a continuous counter device.

Except for when used for commercial transitions, the identification plate shows:

-

- Serial number

‘All transitions prohibited’ dt type =

Class of appliance

When used for commercial transitions, the identification plate shows:

-

-

- Serial number

Weighed products:

- Max=

- v=

QMax mark = dt type =

L = d =

It must be checked. The first phase of the first check is done in the factory on the complete instrument uncoupled from its conveyor, by means of a movement simulator; the other phases are carried out on the complete instrument.

With average precision, the appliance covers the range from the minimum (500 scale divisions) up to 6000 scale divisions. These instruments can be authorized or unauthorized to carry out commercial transitions. If it is unauthorized, ‘PROHIBITED

FOR ALL TRANSACTIONS’ must be written on the appliance’s front panel.

384

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operating a weighing application

20

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the tools that allow you to operate a weighing application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Ways of displaying weighing information

Description of the display transfer

Weighing module operating modes

Page

386

387

389

385

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operation

Ways of displaying weighing information

Description The following table describes the different ways of displaying weighing information.

Ways

TSX XBT H100 module’s display panel (See Description of the

display transfer , p. 387 )

Description

Automatically displays the weight measurement without any prior programming.

Debugging Screen (See

Description of the weighing debug

screen’s display zone, p. 376 )

Displays all information relevant to the weighing and allows the modification of certain parameters (See

Description of the Parameter Adjustment Zone, p. 377 ).

Animation tables

Operation screen

Supervision

All information about the measurement can be accessed as PLC variables and can be displayed in the animation tables.

It is possible to create operation screens (PL7 Pro), using the weighing language objects to display necessary information on the application’s performance there.

The weighing language objects can be conveyed and operated by a supervision system.

Language

Objects

The following language objects are used for operating the weighing application.

Displayed data

Protected module

Non calibrated module

Weight value

Net weight flag

Stability flag

Zero flag

Discrete S0 output status

Discrete S1 output status

Flow

Tare value

Shift register memory

Zero follower flag

Predetermined tare flag

Object address

%MWxy.0.2:X8 (Object for user defined exchange)

%MWxy.0.2:X9 (Object for user defined exchange)

%IDxy.0.0

%IWxy.0.4:X8

%IWxy.0.4:X9

%IWxy.0.4:X10

%IWxy.0.4:X0

%IWxy.0.4:X1

%IDxy.0.2

%IDxy.0.5

%IDxy.0.7

%IWxy.0.4:X11

%IWxy.0.4:X12

386

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operation

Description of the display transfer

General

Illustration

The identifiers provided by the module to the TSX XBT H100 display panel are metrological identifiers (see the documentation on the installation of the TSX XBT

H100).

This display is done automatically, without having to be programmed.

The following illustration introduces the TSX XBT H100 display panel.

1 2 3 4 5

Note: On the TSX XBT H100, a slot is reserved on the punched rating plate to comply with the constraints specified by the legal metrology.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

387

Operation

Description of the display

2

3

4

5

Address

1

Identifier

= none

Net

0

none

+

141.25

kg

All valid measurements are sent to the display panel in a fixed point physical unit every 100ms.

The following table describes the identifiers that can appear on the display panel in a normal operation.

Description

The measurement is stable.

Measurement is not stable (the stability criteria are set in configuration).

The measurement indicates a Net weight.

The measurement indicates a gross weight.

The measurement is positive

The measurement is around 0 (in the range between –1/4 and +1/4 grades).

The measurement is negative: l the associated digital value blinks: the measurement is between –9 grades and –1/

4 grades l if no associated digital value is displayed: the measurement is below –9 grades.

Digital value of the weight.

Unir of mass measurement symbol: g for gram, kg for kilogram, lb for pound, oz for ounce and t for metric tonne.

Note: Testing the serial link is done at the weighing module’s power-up. For this the TSX XBT H100 display panel module must be connected to the TSX ISP Y100 at the PLC’s power-up.

Error messages The following table describes the error identifiers that can appear on the display panel.

Identifier Description

------------The measurement is not valid, a channel error is detected.

>>>>>

<<<<<

Detection of an overload.

Detection of an underload.

Time out The display panel no longer receives the weighing module’s data.

Checksum error

A problem has been encountered at power-up. At power-up, the TSX XBT

H100 runs a test on its resources. During operation, all received information is monitored. If there is a problem, the checksum error is displayed.

388

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Operation

Weighing module operating modes

Operation The following illustration describes the operation of the module.

Power-up

Self-testing

Internal error

Fail

Internal error

End self-testing

Enable

Behavior on encountering an error

During power-up, the module carries out its own self-tests (REPROM , RAM, Link display, etc.).

If an error is detected at the end of these tests, the module switches to fall back mode, the outputs are at 0.

Similarly, if, when operating normally, an internal malfunction (error in RAM, CDG, etc.) is detected in the module, the outputs are positioned to 0 and the display shows dashes on the screen (----).

Behavior on power outage

On power outage the machine parameters are saved (Tare mode, Zero offset, etc.) whereas the operating parameters are lost (Thresholds, number of measurements used to calculate flow rate, etc.).

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

389

Operation

390

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Diagnostics of the weighing application

21

Introduction to Diagnostics

General

Display LEDs

Module or application faults can be detected using the following methods: l l l l display LEDs on the front face of the module, debugging screen, diagnostic screens accessible by the faulty bits and status words.

DIAG keys from the debugging screen,

The operation and status of the module are shown on the display block, these display LEDs are reported in a software method in the debugging screen (See

Description of the module zone on the debugging screen, p. 374):

l two display LEDs display the apply voltage and the correct operation of the module (RUN in green and ERR in red), l the I/O display LED (red) displays an external fault on the measurement channel.

The following table describes the status of the module in operation and the status of the display LEDs.

Flashing Off Display

LED

RUN

Lit

Working normally

ERR

IO

Internal error, module broken down l l l

External errors: l overload or underload error during calibration, range overshoot error, measurement error, sealed module

(configuration refused)

-

Communication error, missing, invalid or faulty application.

Absence of the measurement sensors connector.

Module faulty or switched off

No error

No error

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

391

Diagnostics

Diagnostics screens

The diagnostic screens are accessible using the DIAG buttons from the debugging screen. They enable you to carry out a detailed diagnostic.

When an error is detected, the red indicator lamp located on the DIAG button is lit.

The screen gives 2 DIAG buttons: l module diagnostic, detects module errors (module broken, missing, switched off etc.), l channel diagnostic (below), detects application errors (range overshoot, overload etc.).

The following illustration shows a diagnostic screen.

Module Diagnostics

Internal errors External errors Other errors

OK

Bit and word objects

392

The following bit and word objects can be used in the animation tables or at program level to detect errors.

Object

%Ixy.MOD.ERR

%Ixy.0.ERR

%IWxy.0.4:X2

Meaning when the bit is at status 1

Indicates that the module is faulty.

Indicates that the channel is faulty.

Indicator that voltage is too low. The measurement is deviating. There is a strong possibility of an error on a sensor or in the wiring.

%IWxy.0.4:X3

%IWxy.0.4:X7

%IWxy.0.4:X9

Voltage too high on module input.

Fault during command

Measurement instability. This is set when the measurement is outside the stability range during the defined time. The extent of the stability range and the time are defined during configuration.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X0 Internal error: Module Out of Order.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X1 Functional Error: communication or application error

%MWxy.MOD.2:X5 Configuration Error: the module recognized is not the one expected.

%MWxy.MOD.2:X6 Module fault, missing or switched off

%MWxy.0.2:X0 External error: Overload or underload during calibration

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Diagnostics

Object

%MWxy.0.2:X1

%MWxy.0.2:X2

%MWxy.0.2:X3

%MWxy.0.2:X4

%MWxy.0.2:X5

%MWxy.0.2:X6

%MWxy.0.2:X7

%MWxy.0.2:X8

%MWxy.0.2:X9

%MWxy.0.2:X10

%MWxy.0.2:X11

Meaning when the bit is at status 1

Range overshoot fault or dynamics lower than 4.5mV at calibration.

External error: saturation of the measurement circuit

External error: sealed module, configuration refused

Internal error: module out of order

Configuration Error: the current module is not the one declared at configuration

Communication fault with the processor

Application fault

Protected module error, parameter refused: the module refuses the parameter if it influences the current value.

Non-calibrated module

Overload error

Underload error

393

Diagnostics

394

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Examples of the weighing program

22

At a glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter provides programming examples for a weighing application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Example of a tare mode

Dosage example

Page

396

398

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

395

Examples

Example of a tare mode

Description of the example

Program

This example emphasizes the running of a weighing process by focusing on the essential operations to be carried out: it deals with carrying out a switch into NET weight (tare mode).

The %M101 bit is used for this action. Its positioning causes the gross weight, which is currently measured as the weighed tare, to be acknowledged, then it causes the display to be switched to NET mode.

(* Closed weighing module, slot 6 *)

!(* waiting for tare mode conditions *)

IF %M100 THEN

IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1

THEN

SET %M101;

RESET %M100;

ELSE

RETURN;

END_IF;

END_IF

!(* Tare mode *)

IF %M101 THEN

(* send tare mode order *)

IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1 AND NOT %M102 THEN

%MW6.0.3:=0;

SET %MW6.0.3:X4;

WRITE_CMD %CH6.0;

SET %M102;

END_IF;

(* tare mode ended and OK *)

IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND NOT %MW6.0.1:X1 THEN

%MW6.0.3:=0;

RESET %M101;

RESET %M102;

SET %M103;

ELSE

(* tare mode refused => error *)

IF NOT %MW6.0:X1 AND %MW6.0.1:X1 THEN

SET %M200;

%MW6.0.3:=0;

RESET %M101;

RESET %M102;

RESET %MW6.0.1:X1;

SET %M100;

END_IF;

END_IF;

END_IF;

396

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Summary

Examples

The following table summarizes the language objects for monitoring the exchanges.

%MW6.0:X1 Exchange in progress

%MW6.0.1:X1 Report on the exchanges

%MW6.0.3:X4 Tare mode order

%MW6.0.3

Command order (Tare mode, calibration, etc…)

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

397

Examples

Dosage example

Description of the example

The following example uses a weighing module in slot 2 of the PLC.

It describes a dosage application split into steps as in the diagram below.

Init

Send thresholds

Tare mode

Dosage monitoring continued

Data used in the program

The following table describes the data used in the program for the weighing module:

%IW2.0.4:X0

%IW2.0.4:X1

%IW2.0.4:X5

%CH2.0

%MD2.0.8

%MD2.0.10

%MW2.0:X1

%MW2.0:X2

%MW2.0.1:X1

%MW2.0.1:X2

%MW2.0.2:X2

%MW2.0.2:X7

%MW2.0.3

Image of the S0 output.

Image of the S1 output.

In progress flag

Data structure for sending the command

Large flow cut off point S0

Small flow cut off point S1

Exchange in progress

Send in progress

Command accepted

Command accepted

Saturation of the measurement string

Application fault

Command order

398

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Program

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

The program is processed in structured text:

Main Program

(* ///////// Sending thresholds ///////////*)

%L100:

IF NOT %M99 THEN

JUMP %L120;

END_IF;

(*Loading and sending the thresholds *)

IF RE %M99 THEN

%MD2.0.8:=%MD230;(* S0 Large Flow cut off point*)

%MD2.0.10:=%MD232; (* S1 Small Flow cut off point *)

WRITE_PARAM %CH2.0;JUMP %L120;

END_IF;

(*Send in progress*)

IF %MW2.0:X2 THEN

JUMP %L120;

END_IF;

(*command accepted*)

IF NOT %MW2.0.1:X2 THEN

RESET %M99;

END_IF;

(*END INIT CYCLE*)

%L120:

(* //////// TARE MODE PHASE (%MW100 =4) //////////// *)

%L260:

IF %MW100<>4 THEN

JUMP %L300;

END_IF;

(*Tare mode request *)

IF %M72 THEN

RESET %M72;

%MW270:2:=4;

END_IF;

(*Management of commands *)

SR8; (* %MW270 informs the command type of tare mode 4 *)

(*Waiting for tare mode resonse*)

IF %MW270=-1 AND %MW271=-1 THEN

%MW100:=5;

SET %M72;

JUMP %L800;

END_IF;

Examples

399

Examples

400

Program (continued)

(* //////// DOSAGE PHASE (%MW100 =5) //////////// *)

%L300:

IF %MW100<>5 THEN

JUMP %L340;

END_IF;

(*Confirmation of the thresholds*)

IF %M72 THEN

RESET %M72;

%MW270:2:=8;

END_IF;

(*Management of commands *)

SR8;(* %MW270 = command type of thresholds confirmation 8 *)

(*Waiting for tare mode response*)

IF %MW270>=0 OR %MW271>=0 THEN

JUMP %L800;

END_IF;

(*Monitor outputs to continue*)

IF NOT %IW2.0.4:X0 AND NOT %IW2.0.4:X1 THEN

%MW100:=6;

SET %M72;

JUMP %L800;

END_IF;

(*PHASE 6 continued *)

%L340:

IF %MW100<>6 THEN

JUMP %L380;

END_IF;

%L800:

SUBROUTINE SR8: out *)

(* Send request for the module*)

IF %MW270>=0 THEN (* %MW270 informs of the order to be carried

%M0:16:=0;

SET %M0[%MW270];

%MW2.0.3:=%M0:16;

%MW271:=%MW270;

%MW270:=-1;

WRITE_CMD %CH2.0;

RET;

END_IF;

(*Command in progress ?*)

IF %MW2.0:X1 OR %IW2.0.4:X5 THEN

RET;

END_IF;

END_IF;

(*command accepted ?*)

IF NOT %MW2.0.1:X1 AND NOT %MW2.0.2:X7 THEN

%MW270:2:=-1;

ELSE

%MW270:=%MW271;

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Glossary

C

Calibration

CCX17

Closed loop adjustment

Comparison

Configuration

CPU

Grading a measuring appliance.

Schneider Automation operator dialogue desk family.

PID research method which consists of using a proportional command to start the procedure until it starts to oscillate

Function, which allows you to cancel the static error of a PID without, integral action

The configuration gathers together the data which characterize the machine

(invariable) and which are necessary for the operation of the module. All this information is stored in the PLC %KW constants zone. The PLC application can not modify them.

Central Processing Unit: generic name for Schneider Automation processors.

D

Debugging Debugging is a PL7 service which supports direct control of the module in connected mode.

Derivative action Third parameter of a PID which allows you to anticipate what will happen by accelerating or slowing down a process response.

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

401

Glossary

Device for setting to zero

Discrete

Device supporting "readjustment" of the flag if the zero has drifted (because of an overwrite, for example). This operation can only be done within the zero’s print range

(+/-2% or +/-5% of the maximum range according to the type of weighing instrument).

Discrete inputs/outputs.

E

Explicit exchanges

Exchanges between the CPU and the task modules, initiated by the PL7 program for updating module-specific data.

F

FIPIO Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices.

Flag device (for a weighing instrument)

The part of the device that measures the load where the direct reading of the result is obtained (TSX XBT H100).

G

Grade

Gross weight

A value shown as a unit of mass for the difference between two consecutive identifiers for a numerical identifier.

Indication of the load’s weight on an instrument, when no tare or tare predetermination device has been implemented.

I/O

I

Inputs/Outputs

402

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Integral action Second parameter of a PID which supports the deletion of a static error.

Glossary

L

Leading Encasing an appliance in lead. Putting a rider in the weighing module makes this function possible.

This device guarantees measurement conformity. The accessible parameters only concern the operating aspects of the module’s information via the process control

(the parameters able to modify the measurement conformity: unit, range, grade… are therefore accessible in read-only).

The part of the instrument for holding the load.

Load holder device

Load limit (Lim) The maximum static load that the instrument can support without permanently altering its metrological qualities.

M

Maximum range

(Max)

Metrology

Minimum range

(Min)

Momentum

Maximum weighing capacity, not including the tare’s additional capacity.

The science of weight and measurements.

The load value below which the weighing results can be affected by a very important error.

Inputs/outputs modules using several open standard communication networks.

N

Net weight (N) Indication of a load’s weight on an instrument after implementing a tare device.

Net weight = Gross weight – Tare weight

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

403

Glossary

Non-automatic weighing instruments

Weighing instruments that need to be manned during weighing, for example when placing or removing loads from the load holder device, as well as for getting the result. These instruments support direct observation of the result of the weighing, either by displaying it or printing it.The two possibilities are covered by the

" identifier " word.

O

Open loop adjustment

Operating mode

PID research method which consists of applying a level to the output and make the response the same as an integrator with pure delay time

It is the group of rules which govern the behavior of the module during the transitional phases or upon the appearance of a fault.

P

PID

PID in tandem

PL7

Proportional action

Regulation algorithm made up of a P roportional action, an I ntegral action and a

D erivative action.

Adjustment technique which consists of linking 2 PID in a chain and instructing the second via commands from the first.

Programming software of the Schneider Automation PLCs.

First parameter of a PID which allows you to match the processor’s response speed.

R

Regulation loop Group containing the acquisition of analog measurements, the execution of a PID and the sending of analog commands

404

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Glossary

T

Tare The load placed on the load holder along with the product to be weighed. For example: packaging or a product’s container.

Tare device

Tare mode

Tare predetermining device

Device that allows you to lead the instrument’s identifier to zero when a load is placed on the load holder: l without encroaching on the weighing print range of the net loads (tare additive device), l or reducing the weighing print range of the net loads (tare subtractive device, with the ISP Y100).

An action that allows you to lead the instrument’s identifier to zero when a load is placed on the load holder.

Device supporting subtraction of a predetermined tare value from a gross weight value, which shows the result of this calculation. As a result, the weighing print range is reduced.

TBX Remote analog input/output modules on the FIPIO bus.

TSX/PMX/PCX57 Family of Schneider Automation hardware products.

V

Value of the predetermined tare (PT)

A numerical value, representing a weight, which is entered into the instrument, by input during configuration or setting, or by program.

Value of the tare

(T)

The value of a load’s weight, determined by a tare weighing device.

W

Weighing instruments

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Measuring instruments that determine a body’s mass by using the action of gravity.

405

Glossary

Weighing print range

These instruments can also be used to determine other sizes, quantities, parameters or characteristics to do with the mass. According to their operating nature, the weighing instruments are classed as automatic operation or nonautomatic operation.

The gap between the minimum and maximum range.

Z

Zero follower

Zero Load

A device allowing you to capture any of the zero’s slow drifts, within the limits of the zero format’s print range.

Empty load holder equipped with its mechanical accessories (vibrating extractor, screws, hatch, jack,…). It does not appear in the weight indication, but it must be taken into account for the maximum sensor load calculation.

406

TLX DS 57 PL7 xxE

Index

Symbols

%MW@module, 227

Numerics

170 AAI 030 00, 124

170 AAI 140 00, 128

170 AAI 520 40, 134

170 AAO 120 00, 141

170 AAO 921 00, 146

170 AMM 090 00, 151

A

Accessing the configuration editor

racked analog, 167

remote I/Os, 169

Addressing

Analog rack modules, 219

FIPIO bus, 221

Momentum, 221

TBX, 221

addressing

weighing, 324

AEY 1600, 21

AEY 800, 21

Alignment, 210

Analog, 17

analog, 15

Associated task

analog, 184

TLX DS 57 PL7 43F

A C

B

Bit language objects

Weighing, 330

C

Calibration, 213

calibration

weighing, 362

Channel diagnostics, 206

Channel fault, 206

channel status word

weighing, 338

Channel zone

analog, 164, 166

Closed loop adjustment, 286

Cold junction compensation, 194

AEY 414, 66

Configuration, 161, 162

configuration

weighing, 306

weighing parameter, 307

Configuration function

analog, 163, 165

Controlling a loop, 263

Copy/Paste, 170

D

Data format

Weighing, 312

Debugging, 199, 200

407

Index

Debugging screen, 201

Default parameters

analog, 173, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181

Derivative action, 290

Dialog operator, 260

Display

Weighing, 387

E

Example of application, 275

explicit exchange

weighing, 334

Explicit objects, 226

explicit objects, 336

F

Fallback mode

analog, 196

Fallback to 0

analog, 196

Fallback value, 211

FAST

analog, 184

Filter

analog, 189, 208

Filter alpha coefficient

analog, 189

Filter value

analog, 189

filtering

weighing, 314

Filtering value

analog, 208

FIPIO, 169

flow

weighing, 316

forced calibration

weighing, 369

Forcing, 204

G

Grade, 309

408

H

High precision mode, 195

I

implicit exchanges

weighing, 331

Integral action, 289

L

Language objects, 226

language objects, 336

language word objects

weighing, 331

Leading

Weighing, 382

M

Maintain the value

analog, 196

MAST

analog, 184

Maximum range, 309

Measurement display, 51

Measurement stability

Weighing, 313

Metrological information, 309

Modifying parameters, 170

Module diagnostics, 203

Module fault, 203

Module status word

Weighing, 337

Module zone

analog, 164, 166

Monitoring supply faults, 197

Monitoring under/overshoots

ASY 800, 89

Multiple selection, 170

O

Objects

Implicit, 223

TLX DS 57 PL7 43F

Open loop adjustment, 287

Operating mode

Weighing, 389

Operating modes, 258

Operating modes of the dialog operator, 269

Output behavior

ASY 800, 90

Overload threshold, 309

P

PID function, 241

PID_MMI function, 265

Presence of terminal block, 191

Presymbolization

Weighing, 327

Programming

Weighing, 323

Programming rules, 240

Proportional action, 288

protection

weighing adjustment, 380

PWM function, 248

R

Range, 183

READ_PARAM

Pesage, 354

Regulation functions, 233, 239

RESTORE_PARAM

Weighing, 354

S

SAVE_PARAM

Weighing, 354

Scale

analog, 164, 166

thermo, 187

voltage/current, 185

Scanning cycle

analog, 190

Selecting a loop, 262

Sensor alignment, 103, 116

SERVO function, 252

TLX DS 57 PL7 43F

Setting to zero

Weighing, 345

Sortie

weighing, 318

Supply to outputs, 197

T

tare, 317

Tare mode, 342

Task

Weighing configuration, 308

TBX AES 400, 92

TBX ASS 200, 117

Terminal block detection, 197

threshold

weighing, 318, 349

Timing of AEY1614 measurements, 46

TSX AEY 1600, 20

TSX AEY 1614, 43

TSX AEY 414, 55

TSX AEY 420, 69

TSX AEY 800, 20

TSX AEY 810, 32

TSX ASY 410, 79

TSX ASY 800, 79

Index

U

Unforcing, 204

Units of weight, 309

User defined exchanges

Weighing, 330

W

Weighing, 293

Operation, 298

weighing

implementing, 300

WRITE_CMD

weighing, 341

WRITE_PARAM

Weighing, 354

409

Index

Z

Zero

Weighing, 311

Zero follower

Weighing, 311

410

TLX DS 57 PL7 43F